Home

3Com V7000 Owner's Manual

1. VCX version 7 1 yc is now available Change to the new software version by entering this command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 yc Authentication and Directory service After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX gt opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc Enter the following commands to stop the Authentication and Directory server on Region 2 cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop 240 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y At this point you have upgraded the Authentication and Directory server on Region 1 and Region 2 and you have stopped database replication in both regions The following steps upgrade the databases in each region set up replication in each region and restart the Authentication and Directory server in each region You should still be logged in as root in each region On the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 upgr
2. AN Note that the downgrade procedure does not remove VCX version 7 1 y software from your VCX system This procedure describes how to downgrade a pair of VCX servers running these software configurations m IP Telephony and Messaging m IP Telephony only m IP Messaging only Switch VCX Version To switch the VCX version perform the steps in this section first on the primary server and then on the secondary server Log in as root and enter this command vex switchversion manual 7 x Example vex switchversion manual 7 1 0c The vex switchversion command m Stops VCX services m Changes a link to point to the requested VCX version m Issues a warning that databases must be restored CAUTION Do not reboot the system or restart VCX services until databases have been restored The VCX 7 1 x version has been selected but the databases still contain 7 1 y versioned data This combination will not operate successfully Update the pointer to the configuration file using this command SetConfigFile opt 3com VCX conf VCXConfiguration xml Stop Database Replication If the server is running IP Telephony and IP Messaging server software or IP Telephony server software you must stop database replication CAUTION If the server is running IP Messaging server software do not perform the steps in this section Downgrading from 7 1 y to 7 1 x 307 On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as root and ente
3. Optionally you can use the argument version VCX version When you specify a version the command displays the installed components that match the specified VCX version vox showconfigtype Displays the type of VCX configuration running on the machine Possible returned values include a all Indicates the host system is running as an IP Telephony and IP Messaging Server m Softswitch Indicates the host system is running as an IP Telephony Server ums Indicates the host system is running as an IP Messaging Server callserver Indicates the host system is running as a Call Server a dataserver Indicates the host system is running as an Authentication and Directory Server m bss Indicates the host system is running as a Call Records Server a adhoc Indicates the host system is running as a dedicated Conference Server vox listversions For VCX versions 7 0 and higher lists all the versions of VCX software installed on the machine See Verifying Software Versions Table 20 lists miscellaneous system commands 334 APPENDIX E VCX COMMANDS Table 20 Miscellaneous System Commands Command Description vex sysinfo Displays system information for example host name serial number networking information and disk information vcx ups setup For VCX versions 7 1 and higher configures UPS monitoring on the machine See Adding UPS Support to an Existing VCX System
4. city City Name state State Or Province country Country Name zip Zip Codel phone Old Phone Number new phone New Number site id Site Id remote Host IP Addr Single User Mode This section provides an example illustrating the user mac command Examples syntax required to add modify and delete a user account in single user mode 156 CHAPTER 10 MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The following example adds a user account for jjohnson and assigns the user the phone extension 2314323 The account will be created on the branch office with the site ID Br3 user MAC uname jjhonson password 3dkaRiEI02 title Mr first Jack middle Oliver last Jhonson email jackj dcah com streetl 2132 Rosecrans suite 231 city Rochester state NY country USA zip 14232 phone 2314323 pprofile local site id Br3 You could enter the same command using abbreviated parameter names user MAC u jjhonson pa 3dkaRiEI02 t Mr first Jack mi Oliver 1 Jhonson e jackj dcah com streetl 2132 Rosecrans suite 231 ci Rochester state NY co USA z 14232 ph 2314323 pp local site id Br3 The following simple command quickly adds a user account user MAC u jjhonson ph 2314323 The following command deletes the user account for jjohnson user MAC delete u jjhonson The following command changes the phone extension for the jjohnson user account user MAC mod u jjhonson
5. upsipaddrl 10 230 63 4 communityl private bcharge 33 When this command is executed m UPS monitoring is enabled on the current VCX server m The server is designated the master m The VCX system will be serviced by a multiple UPS devices m The IP address of the first UPS is 10 230 63 3 m The community string the first UPS will use to communicate with the master VCX server is private 134 CHAPTER 8 MANAGING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES m The IP address of the second UPS is 10 230 63 4 m The community string the second UPS will use to communicate with the master VCX server is private m The low battery threshold charge is 33 After the initial master VCX server configuration you can change a parameter value by reentering the vcx ups setup command In the following example the low battery threshold charge is changed to 5096 vex ups setup master Y monitormultipleups Y upsipaddr 10 230 63 3 community private upsipaddrl 10 230 63 4 communityl private bcharge 50 Note that you must include all the vex ups setup command parameters even if you are only changing a single value Dual UPS System Configuring a Slave VCX Server To enable and configure a VCX server as a slave in a multiple UPS system 1 Log in using the root account to the VCX server you want to designate as a slave 2 Enter the following command vex ups setup configuration parameters You must concatenate the following vex ups se
6. 171 participating IP Messaging servers see Configuration Upgrade Options m Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Monitoring Allows any server to be monitored by a UPS see Chapter 8 When you upgrade VCX version 7 0 software to version 7 1 prompts appear in the upgrade script that allow you to enable and configure these three options If you decide not to enable an option during the upgrade to version 7 1 you enable and configure the option later by running the vex reconfigure command see Chapter 7 For UPS Monitoring you can also use the vex ups setup command see Chapter 8 Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers Single site VCX systems can have either two servers or four servers m In a two server configuration each server runs IP Telephony server software and IP Messaging server software m Ina four server configuration one pair of servers runs IP Telephony server software the second pair of servers runs IP Messaging server software Follow the procedure in this section to upgrade the two server configuration at a single site from VCX version 7 0 software to VCX version 7 1 software Before you begin the upgrade procedures on the primary VCX server and on the secondary VCX server perform these steps Log in as root on the primary VCX server and on the secondary VCX server Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary VCX server and then on the secondary VCX server by entering these command
7. Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums restart Managing Authorized SNMP Station Access 63 Managing Authorized SNMP Station Access You can use an SNMP management station such as 3Com Corporation s Enterprise Management Suite to manage a VCX server You must however grant the management station explicit access to the VCX server to enable the exchange of SNMP management and monitoring messages You can add and delete SNMP stations using the cagManageAuthorizedStations script Note the following considerations m The vox reconfigure Script provides the option to enable or disable management station authentication Enabling management station authentication allows you to specify up to four stations using vcx reconfigure m Authorized stations added through cagManageauthorizedStations or through EMS must be deleted through cagManageAuthorizedStations or through EMS You cannot selectively remove one of these stations while running vcx reconfigure refer to the VCX Installation Guide for information tO vex reconfigure Authorized stations added through cagManageAuthorizedStations Or EMS are not visible from vcx reconfigure m If you disable management station authentication while running vex reconfigure all previously configured authorized stations are removed To allow an SNMP management station access to a VCX server Log on the VCX server you want to manage using the root account En
8. Upgrading the Regional Call Servers tar xvf vcx ipmsg 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 yc is now available b Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 y IP Messaging services c After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc 4 Upgrade the secondary IP Messaging server by following the procedure described in step 3 This section describes how to upgrade regional Call servers Call servers are typically installed in redundant pairs primary and
9. cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication 226 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y The drop replication script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for this system For single site systems the site ID is identical for both the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press Enter to accept the default C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of ethO on the primary VCX server d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address of ethO on the secondary VCX server e TheDo you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes Enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Stop IP Messaging first on the primary IP Messaging server and then on the secondary IP Messaging server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop Obtain a copy of the vex softswitch 7 1 yc tar softwar
10. 181 Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the primary IP Telephony server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the primary IP Telephony server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx softswitch 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable Adhoc Conferencing and UPS Monitoring The Adhoc Conferencing prompt appears In order to support ad hoc conferences with more than 3 participants the Adhoc Conference Service is used This service should be enabled on this server unless another Server dedicated to Adhoc Conferencing will be used instead If available a separate server typically provides greater capacity and may be shared among sites Use the Adhoc service on this server Y N Y If you want this server to act as a multi caller up to 6 callers conferencing server enter y If not enter n The UPS Monitoring prompt appears
11. Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on this server the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 If there are more than one Master Sites this question repeats until the number of master sites specified in step b is reached e The Do you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes When the replication is complete Multi Master Replication Status is reported as NORMAL Do not continue to the next step on this server until the replication is complete Note that replication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete f You can check the replication by entering the following command checkReplication Set up database replication on Region 2 by entering the following commands you should still be logged in to the Authentication and Directory server as cworks cd opt 3com VCX vexdata bin setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for Region 2 b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE prompt appears Enter the number of Maste
12. The VCX Call Processor provides call routing as well as other call services for the VCX IP Telephony Solution This chapter includes the following topics m Call Processor Overview m Configuration Methods Configuring Trusted Endpoints wm Configuring Accounting and Directory Services 142 CHAPTER 9 CONFIGURING THE CALL PROCESSOR Call Processor Overview Call Processor Advantages The Call Processor handles both call processing and call routing and acts as a SIP back to back user agent This means that the Call Processor actually serves as one active end point for each signaling leg of a call The Call Processor advantages are Uses stateful routing maintains information about a user s session Designed for memory and performance utilization recycles its own memory and keeps track of that memory so that any problems can be identified and fixed quickly Built in diagnostics Can be accessed through the CLI to troubleshoot the system Writes one CDR The Call Processor writes only one CDR per call containing all information for that call which makes the system more efficient Configuration Methods Call Processor configuration is normally completed during the installation of VCX system software However you may need to reconfigure the Call Processor after the installation for example to add additional trusted end points if you add a branch office There are three recommended methods of co
13. a On the Region 1 Call server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop b On the Region 2 Call server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop c On the Region 1 VCX Authentication and Directory server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop d Log in as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin backupVexdata cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata db export There should be a single file with this format vcxdata regionl sitelD backup vcx data version tgz e To transfer the file to the VCX Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 enter these commands scp vexdata regionl siteID gt backup lt vcx data version tgz cworksG region2 IPaddress gt opt 3com VCX vcxdata db export f Log onto the Region 2 VCX Authentication and Directory server as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Manually Configuring Region to Region Replication 95 Log in as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin restoreVcxdata Enter the Site ID for Region 1 Enter these commands backupVexdata cd opt 3com VCX vexdata db export There should be a single file with this format vcxdata region 2 site ID gt backup lt vcx data version gt tgz To place the file on the VCX Authentication and Directory server in Regio
14. the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts 6 The Global Voicemail Integration prompt appears When multiple IP Messaging systems are in use for example at a region and one or more branches the Global Voicemail capability allows these systems to act as a single unified voicemail system Say yes here if this system participates in Global Voicemail Is Global Voicemail enabled N a If you have installed and configured through the IP Messaging administrator configuration interface a pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS to enable global voicemail integration you can answer y to this prompt and go to step b If not enter n and go to step 7 Upgrading the Regional Call Servers Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 203 b The upgrade script asks if this server as a Global Voicemail Central Server In a Global Voicemail system one site s IPMSG servers are designated as the Central Servers and coordinate the feature s operation Typically the Central Servers are at one of the regional sites Is this a Central Server for Global Voicemail N If this server has been configured as a Global Voicemail Central Server enter y and go to step 7 If you answer n to indicate that this is not a Central Server you will be prompted to enter the Central
15. vcx ups status For VCX versions 7 1 and higher displays UPS status on the machine See Monitoring UPS Status CALL PROCESSOR COMMAND LINE INTERFACE COMMANDS This chapter contains a complete listing of command line interface CLI commands available for managing the call processor This chapter includes the following topics m Call Processor CLI Overview m CLI Command Descriptions 336 APPENDIX F CALL PROCESSOR COMMAND LINE INTERFACE COMMANDS Call Processor CLI Overview AN The call processor can be configured from the server where the call processor was installed by using the remoteCLI application CAUTION Consult with your authorized 3Com technical support representative before using the remoteCLI application to reconfigure a call processor Incorrect use of this application can render the call processor inoperable The remote CLI application is located in the following directory opt 3com VCX callprocessor remoteCli bin The remoteCLI application requires either console or SSH access using the root account to the server hosting the call processor you want to manage The commands in the following example log in to a call processor change to correct directory and start the remoteCLI application ssh root lt ip address gt password cd opt 3com VCX callprocessor remoteCli bin remoteCli callp gt The application uses the same editing style as the text editor vi The CLI interface provides a
16. CAUTION If you add one or both of these services using the method described in this section and later you run the vcx reconfigure command the list of services provided in vex reconfigure will override those defined using remoteCli Furthermore if you reconfigure your VCX system using remoteCli and subsequently upgrade the system to a newer release the upgrade process will not recognize the remoteCli reconfiguration You will have to manually reconfigure your system using remoteCli to match your previous configuration Consult with your 3Com representative before using the remoteCli to configure Accounting services or Authentication and Directory services on your VCX system To add a primary Accounting server using the remoteCLI interface Log onto the server hosting the primary Call Processor 2 Navigate to the opt 3com VCX callprocessor remoteCli bin 3 Start the remoteCLl interface remoteCli callprocessor At the remoteCli prompt gt enter config acctc use false config accts pri 1 IpAddress lt IP address of primary Accounting server gt config accts pri 1 LocalIpAddress lt IP address of call processor gt config acctc use true 5 The interface lists the IP address of the new Accounting server 6 To exit the remoteCLI interface enter exit To add a secondary Accounting server using the remoteCLIl interface Log onto the server hosting the primary Call Processor 2 Navigate to the opt 3com VCX callprocessor remo
17. Log onto the server hosting the Call Processor 2 Navigate to the opt 3com VCX callprocessor remoteCli bin 3 Start the remoteCLl interface remoteCli callprocessor At the remoteCLI prompt gt enter config CcTrusted RowStatus RowStatus variable index lt index ID TrustedAddress lt IP address of endpoint See Table 12 for descriptions and values of the configurable parameters To exit the remoteCLl interface enter exit To delete a trusted endpoint from the Call Processor using the remoteCLI interface Log onto the server hosting the Call Processor 2 Navigate to the opt 3com VCX callprocessor remoteCli bin 3 Start the remoteCLl interface remoteCli callprocessor At the prompt gt enter config CcTrusted RowStatus 6 index lt index ID TrustedAddress IP address of endpoint See Table 12 for descriptions and values of the configurable parameters To exit the remoteCLlI interface enter exit Configuring Accounting and Directory Services This section describes how to add and delete servers that provide Accounting services and Authentication and Directory services Configuration of these services is normally completed during the installation of VCX system software However you can reconfigure Accounting services and Authentication and Directory services after the installation 146 CHAPTER 9 CONFIGURING THE CALL PROCESSOR AN Adding Primary and Secondary Accounting Servers
18. Shutdown A dialog box displays the progress of the command When the Common Agent has been restarted the Working icon changes to a Finished icon Click Close Restarting the Common Agent Managing the Common Agent 53 If the Common Agent is currently running use EMS to restart the Common Agent immediately or gracefully If the Common Agent is stopped EMS will not be able to communicate with the VCX system to issue the restart command The Common Agent can also be restarted from the VCX console Using Operating System Commands If the Common Agent has been stopped you can start it using operating system commands Log in to the server running the Common Agent you want to restart using the root account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX commagent vcx scripts init d commagent start The commagent script does not accept restart Or status as a valid arguments Using EMS You can use EMS to restart the Common Agent immediately or gracefully To restart the Common Agent immediately From the Explorer tab right click 3Com SNMP Agent From the pop up menu select Maintenance then select Hard Shutdown To restart the Common Agent gracefully From the Explorer tab right click 3Com SNMP Agent From the pop up menu select Maintenance then select Graceful Shutdown A dialog box displays the progress of the command When the Common Agent has been restarted the Working icon changes to a Finished icon
19. Stop the Authentication and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the primary IP Messaging server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the primary IP Messaging server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx ipmsg 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are senem enimse Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available 2 Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File 3 Install the license key See Installing a License Key File 4 Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 0 xc Specify whether this IP Messaging system will support IP Messaging clients The upgrade script displays the following prompt Will this system support IPMSG client systems N 268 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 IP Messaging can be deployed in a client server configuration to support more users and distribute services a lf you enter N this system will be configured as the
20. back port any configuration or database modifications you might have made while running version 7 1 y Following this procedure restores the VCX system to the operational state it was in prior to the upgrade occurring If an upgrade at a regional office is unsuccessful contact your 3Com Support for assistance and downgrade the regional office servers Do not upgrade any branch office servers that are associated with that regional office until the regional office upgrades are successful The database schema version on a branch office server must match the schema version on the regional office Authentication and Directory server After a successful upgrade of a regional office if an upgrade of any branch office server is unsuccessful contact your 3Com Support for assistance and downgrade that branch office server The VCX system supports two operating system images If the upgrade required installation of a new VCX operating system version then the downgrade must revert to the previous installation The person performing the downgrade should be trained in VCX operation and procedures and be familiar with VCX terminology This downgrade procedure assumes the VCX version 7 1 x system databases were backed up before the upgrade to version 7 1 y was performed These version 7 1 x backups will be restored as part of the downgrade procedure 306 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE Downgrading a Single Site System 7 1 y to 7 1 x
21. not upgrade any branch office servers that are associated with that regional office until the regional office upgrades are successful The database schema version on a branch office server must match the schema version on the regional office Authentication and Directory server After a successful upgrade of a regional office if an upgrade of any branch office server is unsuccessful contact your 3Com Support for assistance and downgrade that branch office server 294 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE Downgrading a Single Site System 7 1 to 7 0 m The VCX system supports two operating system images If the upgrade required installation of a new VCX operating system version then the downgrade must revert to the previous installation m The person performing the downgrade should be trained in VCX operation and procedures and be familiar with VCX terminology m This downgrade procedure assumes the VCX version 7 0 system databases were backed up before the upgrade to version 7 1 was performed These version 7 0 backups will be restored as part of the downgrade procedure Note that the downgrade procedure does not remove VCX version 7 1 software from your VCX system This procedure describes how to downgrade a pair of VCX servers running these software configurations m IP Telephony and Messaging m IP Telephony only m IP Messaging only Switch VCX Version To switch the VCX version perform the steps in this sectio
22. ph 5552121 new ph 5552222 Using Batch Mode In batch mode you create either a comma separated values CSV file or an XML file to use as input for user mac command processing Each request CSV line or XML transaction node makes up a transaction m An XML file can contain a mixture of add delete and modify transactions You cannot use a modify transaction to change the site ID of a user account The site ID site id is required for a modify transaction if the account to be changed is located at a branch site If the account is located on another region the modify transaction must specify a site ID site id and remote IP address remote m ACSV file can contain add transactions only Managing User Accounts with an XML File Using Batch Mode 157 Batch mode processing can run in either stop mode the default or non stop mode the user MAc command line includes the non stop qualifier For both modes during the initial parse the input file is validated for format but not for content validity If the parse encounters a formatting error for example an angle bracket gt is missing in an XML file processing stops m n stop mode if an error is found after the initial parse is complete processing stops m n non stop mode if an error is found after the initial parse is complete the offending transaction is dumped but processing continues to the next transaction in the file Console output provides
23. prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes 5 Enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Obtain a copy of the vex dataserver 7 1 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Authentication and Directory server The variable x indicates the version of VCX software for example vex al1 7 0 3c tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number Enter these commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcox dataserver 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 x install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are 8 10 11 Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 197 Sess Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available Change to the new software version by entering this command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable UPS Monitoring The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring serv
24. stopping 46 verifying status 46 U ums_cbipi log monitoring 48 Uninterruptible Power Supply See UPS upgrade version 6 0 to version 7 0 252 license keys 256 multi site with branches 274 multi site without branches 273 single site 258 264 version 7 0 to version 7 1 167 multi site with branches 191 multi site without branches 189 single site 171 178 version 7 1 x to version 7 1 y 217 multi site with branches 234 multi site without branches 232 single site 219 225 UPS as SNMP device 125 configuration options 125 disabling 135 enabling 135 in branch offices 124 in regional offices 124 master server 126 monitoring status 136 343 multiple configuration 130 master 132 options 130 slave 134 overview 124 power event responses 138 requirements 127 set up during upgrade 171 setup guidelines 126 setup options 125 single configuration 127 master 127 slave 129 slave server 126 supported hardware 125 vcx ups setup command 125 vcx ups status command 125 syntax 136 user accounts attributes 150 creating automatically 150 on remote sites 151 user MAC command 150 user MAC command associated files 162 modes 150 154 parameters 152 syntax 154 batch mode 156 single user mode 155 using 151 with CSV files 156 161 with XML files 156 157 VCX configuration backup and restore 70 considerations 71 backup file contents 70 backup file structure 73 examining backup and restore log files 77 usi
25. the main menu Use this option to view all of the Accounting services that are configured for this Call Records service To view all configured Accounting services Log on to the VCX server hosting the Call Records service as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX bssxml bin config sh A menu of configuration options appears followed by the SELECT OPERATION prompt 2 Atthe prompt enter 204 3 The screen displays the number of configured Accounting services Press Enter to view the Accounting services clustered in their group until you reach the main menu prompt Use this option to view which group an Accounting service belongs to the IP address of an Accounting service the protocol type used the port number used the path where the generated CDRs are located and the username of the Accounting service To view the details of a configured Accounting service Log on to the VCX server hosting the Call Records service as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX bssxml bin config sh A menu of configuration options appears followed by the SELECT OPERATION prompt 2 Atthe prompt enter 205 Managing CDRs and Super CDRs 37 3 The screen displays the number of configured Accounting services Press Enter to view the Accounting services clustered in their group until you reach the Enter Source Name to View Details prompt Enter the name of the appropriate Accounting service The Accounting
26. user s address for example an apartment number city or ci Yes Single String The value specifies the user s city state Yes Single String The value specifies the user s state or province country or co Yes Single String The value specifies the user s country Zip or Z Yes Single String The value specifies the user s zip code phone or ph Yes Single String Mandatory The value specifies the phone extension to be assigned to the user account The specified number must be unique on the Call Processor pprofile Yes Single String The value specifies the phone profile to be used by the account All phones must be assigned a phone profile To create the account with the default phone profile omit this field site id Yes Single String The value specifies the site identifier assigned to the location hosting the account This ID is specified during VCX software installation procedure remote Yes Single String The value specifies the IP address in dotted decimal notation of a remote Authentication and Directory server 154 CHAPTER 10 MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Note the following syntax considerations Full parameter and abbreviated parameter names must be prefaced with two hyphens for example password String parameter values that include spaces punctuation or special characters must be enclosed in double quotation marks For example the address 26 Granite Stre
27. validating a username and password Authorization for example verifying a user is allowed to make an international call User specific routing or translation for example processes a personal speed dial number a Directory routing and translation functions The routing function identifies selects and prioritizes all the possible routes for a given call The translation function manipulates the access number as a call propagates through the system m Accounting Service Sends exports and manages CDRs a SIP Phone Downloader Loads an application image on to a 3Com phone which enables SIP support on the phone Common Agent Connects other software components and the VCX server operating system to the Enterprise Management Suite EMS or other SNMP based network management tools m Provisioning Service Provides a web based user interface for managing authentication and directory data m Call Records Service Stores CDRs received from the Accounting Service Sometimes referred to as the Billing Server a IP Messaging Service Provides integrated voice messaging fax and e mail capabilities and advanced messaging features such as Find Me Follow Me call routing and text to speech e mail reading Also supports Global Voicemail Integration which links regional and branch office IP Messaging servers through a universal mailbox directory on a special IP Messaging server called the Global Voicemail Cen
28. 6 Characters to Avoid in File and Directory Names continued Character Description Dollar sign Exclamation mark lt and gt Left and right carets Bar amp Ampersand Semicolon and Left and right parentheses Pound or hash character At sign Euro sign Space and tab characters 26 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW CONFIGURING THE CALL RECORDS SERVICE This chapter describes how to configure accounting groups on the Call Records service An accounting group identifies the Accounting services from which the Call Records service should collect Call Detail Records CDRs This includes the following topics m Call Records Service Overview Configuring an Accounting Service Group m Adding Accounting Services to the Call Records Service m Managing CDRs and Super CDRs m QoS Monitoring Statistics 28 CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING THE CALL RECORDS SERVICE Call Records Service Overview A Call Detail Record CDR contains information about a processed call This information can include the identity of the calling and called parties the duration of the call and the type of call CDRs can be imported by third party billing platforms to generate billing statements In a VCX system CDRs can be generated by a call processor or by an IP Messaging server wm Call processor CDRs are collected by one or more VCX Accounting services and then sent to the Call Records servi
29. APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE c Select option 2 Create as Backup Database schema for a Regional Office m Restore databases to the schema and backup schema on each Authentication and Directory server See Restore VCX Databases m Setup database replication for both schema pairs on each Authentication and Directory server See Restart VCX Database Replication Finally on each Authentication and Directory server you must switch operation systems and reboot See Switch Operating System Versions and Reboot Downgrading IP Messaging Servers If a downgrade from version 7 0 to version 6 0 is required on a pair of regional IP Messaging servers follow the procedures for IP Messaging described in Downgrading a Single Site System Specifically you should execute the procedures described in Switch VCX Version and Switch Operating System Versions and Reboot on the primary IP Messaging server and then the secondary IP Messaging server Downgrading Call Servers If a downgrade from version 7 0 to version 6 0 is required on a pair of regional Call servers follow the procedures described in Switch VCX Version and Switch Operating System Versions and Reboot on the primary Call server and then the secondary Call server Downgrading the Call Records Server If a downgrade from version 7 0 to version 6 0 is required on regional Call Records server follow the procedures described in Switch VCX Version and Sw
30. An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation 182 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 Upgrading the Primary IP Messaging Server 1 Enable UPS monitoring N If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts After completing the Adhoc Conferencing and UPS Monitoring prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the System starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Stop the Authenticati
31. Click Close 54 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS Managing the Call Processor Service Verifying the Call Processor Status Starting the Call Processor 1 1 This section describes how to start and stop the Call Processor service and how to view Call Processor service status The script that starts the Call Processor service runs the Call Processor service in the background with the Call Processor process monitor The process monitor monitors the Call Processor server application and restarts it if the application stops Once the Call Processor service is started it is automatically restarted by the process monitor if there is a failure and it is automatically restarted if the VCX server is rebooted The Call Processor service does not need to be started again unless one of the following exceptions occurs m You stop the Call Processor service using the script with the stop option m The process monitor exceeds the set number of automatic restarts To verify that the Call Processor service is running Log in into the server hosting the Call Processor service using the root account Enter the following command ps ef grep call m The Call Processor service is running if the Call Processor Process ID is listed m The Call Processor service is not running if only the root ID is listed To start the Call Processor service Log in into the server hosting the Call Processor service using the root account Enter th
32. Database Replication 262 Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 264 Upgrading the Primary IP Telephony Server 266 Upgrading the Primary IP Messaging Server 267 Upgrading the Secondary IP Telephony Server 269 Upgrading the Secondary IP Messaging Server 270 Set Up Database Replication 271 Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices 273 Upgrading the Call Records Server 273 Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 274 Multi Site VCX System Upgrade Order 275 Upgrading the Regional Authentication and Directory Servers 275 Upgrading the Regional IP Messaging Servers 281 Upgrading the Regional Call Servers 283 Upgrading the Regional Call Records Server 284 Upgrading the Branch Offices 285 DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE Verifying Software Versions 292 Downgrading from 7 1 to 7 0 293 Important Considerations 293 Downgrading a Single Site System 7 1 to 7 0 294 Downgrading a Multiple Site System 7 1 to 7 0 298 Downgrading from 7 1 y to 7 1 x 305 Important Considerations 305 Downgrading a Single Site System 7 1 y to 7 1 x 306 Downgrading a Multiple Site System 7 1 y to 7 1 x 309 Downgrading from 7 0to 6 0 317 Important Considerations 317 Downgrading a Single Site System 318 Downgrading a Multi Site System 322 VCX COMMANDS Command Descriptions 330 10 F CALL PROCESSOR COMMAND LINE INTERFACE COMMANDS Call Processor CLI Overview 336 CLI Command Descriptions 337 INDEX ABOUT TH
33. Id Optional Specifies the site identifier assigned to the location hosting the account This ID is specified during VCX software installation procedure Host Name Optional Specifies the IP address in dotted decimal notation of an Authentication and Directory server Phone Profile Optional Specifies the phone profile to be used by the account All phones must be assigned a phone profile If no profile is specified the phone is assigned to the default phone profile 1 When the add transaction executes there can be no other user with the same name in the database You can create modify or delete user accounts on remote sites m To create modify or delete user accounts on a branch office from the regional office associated with the branch you must use the Site Id attribute Furthermore the Authentication and Directory service on the target system must be available a port must be open in the firewall on the branch m To create modify or delete user accounts on a remote office from a regional office you must use the Site Id attribute and the Host Name attribute specifying the IP address of the remote system Furthermore the Authentication and Directory service on the target system must be available a port must be open in the firewall on the remote system To use the user MAC command Log into the primary VCX server using the cworks account Enter the following command cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin You can n
34. Integration on an entire IP Messaging system A GVCS coordinates mailbox creation and mailbox updates on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers If you want to enable Global Voicemail Integration on a 7 1 system you must install IP Messaging software on a GVCS and then set up the GVCS through the IP Messaging administrator configuration interface Next run vex reconfigure see Chapter 7 on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers to enable Global Voicemail Integration Refer to the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for more information and for configuration options m Call server software Supported on multi site systems that include servers at regional offices with or without branch offices m Call Records server software Supported on multi site systems installed on a single server for regional offices with or without branch offices m Authentication and Directory server software Supported on multi site systems that include servers at regional offices with or without branch offices You should upgrade each server from a locally attached console The upgrade procedure includes a reboot of each upgraded server If you perform an upgrade remotely using a secure shell client for example you will be logged out when the reboot occurs When you log back in it may not be apparent that the upgrade has completed If you enter commands before the upgrade has finished the upgrade will fail Si
35. Server IP address After completing the Adhoc Conferencing UPS Monitoring and Global Voicemail Integration prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Upgrade the secondary IP Messaging server by following the procedure described in steps 3 through 7 Note that the Global Voicemail Integration prompt step 6 does not appear for a secondary IP Messaging server upgrade This section describes how to upgrade regional Call servers Call servers are typically installed in redundant pairs primary and secondary in a multi site VCX system You need to perform the steps in this section on a console attached to each Call server in all regions Region 1 and Region 2 in this example 204 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 To upgrade the Call servers 1 Log on as root to the primary Call server and the secondary Call server in a region 2 Obtain a copy of the vex callserver 7 1 xc tar s
36. Servers wm Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices m Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices During a VCX system upgrade or downgrade users cannot make calls within the system However users may be able to make emergency calls or make calls to and receive calls from destinations outside of the VCX system that is the PSTN This capability depends on the availability configuration and capacity of the media gateway or gateways set up in the VCX system See the VCX Installation Guide for information on configuring a failover call route point Also refer to your gateway documentation 166 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 Verifying Software Versions This section describes how to verify the software versions of individual components and entire releases Verifying Component Software Versions To verify what the component software versions are Log onto the VCX system as root 2 Navigate to opt 3com VCX scripts Enter this command vex assemble validate This lists all of the components and their software versions that comprise the current running assembly Verifying Release Software Version For any version of VCX software you can determine the release running on the system by following these steps Log onto the VCX system as root Enter the following commands cd opt 3com ls 1 This command returns a list all of the installed releases and indica
37. Services 145 Adding Primary and Secondary Accounting Servers 146 10 Adding Primary and Secondary Authentication and Directory Servers 147 MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS UsiNG THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Overview 150 Using Single User Mode 152 Command Modes 154 Single User Mode Command Syntax 155 Single User Mode Examples 155 Using Batch Mode 156 Managing User Accounts with an XML File 157 Adding User Accounts with a CSV File 161 Files and Directories 162 UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 Verifying Software Versions 166 Overview of a 7 0 to 7 1 Upgrade 167 Preliminary Steps 168 Post Upgrade Considerations 168 Configuration Upgrade Options 169 Configuring New Features 170 Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers 171 Upgrading the Primary VCX Server 173 Upgrading the Secondary VCX Server 175 Set Up Database Replication 177 Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 178 Upgrading the Primary IP Telephony Server 181 Upgrading the Primary IP Messaging Server 182 Upgrading the Secondary IP Telephony Server 184 Upgrading the Secondary IP Messaging Server 186 Set Up Database Replication 187 Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices 189 Upgrading the Call Records Server 189 Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 191 Multi Site VCX System Upgrade Order 192 Upgrading the Regional Authentication and Directory Servers 192 Upgrading the Regional IP Messaging Servers 200 Up
38. Stopping a Service To view the status of the Accounting service or the Authentication and Directory service Log in to the server hosting the service whose status you want to view using the root account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d back end server status For back end server enter one of the following identifiers m For an Accounting service enter 40acctxml m For an Authentication and Directory service enter s20vexdata To start the Accounting service or the Authentication and Directory service Log in to the server hosting the service you want to start using the root account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d back end server start For lt back end server enter one of the following identifiers m For an Accounting service enter 40acctxml m For an Authentication and Directory service enter s20vexdata To stop the Accounting service or the Authentication and Directory service Log in to the server hosting the service you want to stop using the root account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d back end server stop For back end server enter one of the following identifiers m For an Accounting service enter 40acctxml m For an Authentication and Directory service enter s20vexdata 58 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS Restarting a Service Enabling Message Tracing gt To restart the Accoun
39. VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Telephony and Messaging Server for more information C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site If there are more than one Master Sites this question repeats until the number of master sites specified in step b is reached e TheDo you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes When the replication is complete Multi Master Replication Status is reported as NORMAL Do not continue to the next step on this server until the replication is complete Note that replication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete f You can check the replication by entering the following command checkReplication 6 Set up database replication on Region 2 by entering the following commands you should still be logged in to the Authentication and Directory server as cworks cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow the procedure described in step 5 7 Once replication is complete and status is NORMAL on Region 1 and Region 2 start the Authentication and Directory servers in each region by entering the following commands while
40. a running indication of progress and an action summary on completion Command processing generates two log files whose names and locations are displayed on your console One file contains a summary of command actions The second file contains debug information that is useful if processing fails If the log files cannot be created command processing halts See Files and Directories for location information You can use an XML file as input to the user mac command Transactions in the file can add modify or delete user accounts 3Com Corporation recommends that an XML file contain no more than 5000 transactions While this is not a hard limit exceeding 5000 transactions may cause performance issues Use the following syntax to specify an XML file as input to the user mac command and get the return code displayed on your console user MAC xml InputFileName xml non stop echo RET The XML support files are located in the opt 3com VCX vcxdata conf directory and are described in subsequent sections XML Input File DTD The DTD file that specifies XML format for user mac command input is named user MAC transactions dtd and has the following structure lt ELEMENT user MAC transactions transactions gt lt ELEMENT transaction uname phone 158 gt CHAPTER 10 MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE newPhone newUname password title first middle last email street
41. account and return to the root account exit Stop IP Messaging first on the primary IP Messaging server and then on the secondary IP Messaging server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop Obtain a copy of the vex softswitch 7 0 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary IP Telephony server and on the secondary IP Telephony server The variable x indicates the version of VCX software for example vex all 7 0 3c tar that will replace version 6 0 The letter c is always appended to the version number Obtain a copy of the vex ipmsg 7 0 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary IP Messaging server and on the secondary IP Messaging server 266 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 Upgrading the Primary IP Telephony Server 1 Next execute the following steps in the order listed a Upgrade the primary IP Telephony server See Upgrading the Primary IP Telephony Server wm Upgrade the primary IP Messaging server See Upgrading the Primary IP Messaging Server m Upgrade the secondary IP Telephony server See Upgrading the Secondary IP Telephony Server wm Upgrade the primary IP Messaging server See Upgrading the Secondary IP Messaging Server m Setup database replication on the primary IP Telephony server See Set Up Database Replication Follow
42. and on the secondary IP Messaging server Start the upgrade process on the primary IP Messaging server by entering the following commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx ipmsg 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade 202 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Suec eue reme Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available 4 Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable UPS Monitoring and Global Voicemail Integration 5 The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter
43. but the databases still contain 7 1 y versioned data This combination will not operate successfully Update the pointer to the configuration file using this command SetConfigFile opt 3com VCX conf VCXConfiguration xml Stop Database Replication On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop On the Master Site the secondary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin dropReplication When the script prompts you enter the site ID of the Master Site Restore Databases Before upgrading from version 7 1 x to 7 1 y you must have backed up the system databases Restore the database on branch office server See Restoring the VCX Authentication and Directory Server Database VCX systems require database replication between the regional and branch office servers You must restore the database on both the regional Data server and the branch office server If the branch office server is running the IP Messaging software restore the IP Messaging database See the P Messaging Operations and System Administration Guide VCX systems require mirroring between IP Messaging servers You must restore the database on both the regional office IP Messaging server an
44. call disconnects This is typically the time when the billing stops 20050414 19 54 07 f2 CALLDURATIONCONNECTTODISCONN Call duration in seconds from connect to disconnect f3 CODECTYPE Audio CODEC type used for the call such as G 729 G 711 or G 723 For internal use only N A Managing CDRs and Super CDRs 39 Table 7 CDR Field Descriptions and Values continued Tag Variable Description and Values Example f4 CALLTERMINATIONCAUSE Reason for call disconnect or not 404 completed Note that a value of zero indicates that the call has not been disconnected or that no disconnect reason was given Only one value can be provided as the disconnect reason The codes listed come directly from the all processor and correspond to SIP error codes You can find a detailed list under SIP RFC 3261 h7 SIGNALINGPROTOCOL Type of Signaling Protocol N A For internal use only h8 PROTOCOLTRANSPORT Type of Protocol Transport N A For internal use only jb CALLMODEL Call Model N A For internal use only j8 TRANSLATEDCALLEDPARTYE164ADDR Translated Called Party E 164 304001 address 11 TEXTCALLIDENTIFIER SIP Text Call Identifier 80990ea1 8cab d911 9410 a c771eb4454b o0 FEATURESUSED Indicates the feature used duringa 4 call 1 Speed dial 2 Call forward unconditional 4 Call forward ring no answer 8 Call forward busy 16 Calling identity suppression o1 URIID URI ID which is used
45. command S70tomcat start Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices Some VCX multi site systems have regional offices but no branch offices Each regional office contains a primary VCX server and a secondary VCX server These servers perform call processing and IP Messaging tasks One of the regional offices also contains a Call Records server which gathers call records from each of the regional offices wm To upgrade the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server follow the instructions in Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers earlier in this appendix wm To upgrade the Call Records server see the following section Upgrading the Call Records Server Upgrading the Call Records Server Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices 233 To upgrade the Call Records server Log in to the Call Records server as root Stop all VCX processes on the Call Records server by entering the following command cd etc init d vex stop Obtain a copy of the vex bss 7 1 yc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Call Records server Enter these commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcox bss 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system di
46. command is tracked using syslog Information about each backup and restore operation is written to var log messages Logged messages for each operation include information such as the type of operation backup or restore the name of the backup file the success or failure of the operation and if the operation failed a reason for the failure You can use the following command to display the last ten lines in the messages file tail f var log messages The argument leaves the file open and displays messages as they are recorded Press Ctrl C to cancel the operation 78 CHAPTER 4 BACKING UP AND RESTORING A VCX CONFIGURATION MANAGING AUTHENTICATION AND DIRECTORY SERVICE DATABASES This chapter describes how to manage the database associated with each Authentication and Directory service This chapter includes the following topics m Backing Up and Restoring the Authentication and Directory Server Database m Exporting Table Data 80 CHAPTER 5 MANAGING AUTHENTICATION AND DIRECTORY SERVICE DATABASES Backing Up and Restoring the Authentication and Directory Server Database gt Backing Up the VCX Authentication and Directory Server Database Your VCX system includes backup and restore utilities for the VCX Authentication and Directory server database This database includes provisioning data configured through the VCX Administrator web interface refer to the VCX Administration Guide 3Com recomm
47. commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat start b Login to the server hosting the Authentication and Directory service using the cworks account and enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start VCX systems whether single site or multi site typically include redundant pairs of servers The steps in this section describe how to restore an archived database backup file on a pair primary and secondary of VCX Authentication and Directory servers The procedure also assumes database replication is enabled between the two servers Depending on the reason for the restoration you may need to execute the steps on only one server 82 CHAPTER 5 MANAGING AUTHENTICATION AND DIRECTORY SERVICE DATABASES To run the VCX Authentication and Directory server database restore utility 1 Log in to the server hosting the Authentication and Directory database backup file The steps in this procedure assume the backup file is located on another Authentication and Directory server Log in using the cworks account 2 Enter the following command to change to the directory where backup files are located cd opt 3com VCX vcoxdata db export 3 Enter the following secure copy command using the password cworks to copy the vcxdata lt site ID backup version number tgz file generated by the backup utility to the opt 3com VCX vcxdata db import directory scp vexdata lt site ID gt backup tgz cworks lt IP add
48. e mail comments about this guide or about any Voice product documentation to VOICE Techcomm commentsQ3com com Include the following information with your comments Document title m Document part number found on the front page m Page number m Your name and organization optional Example VCX Maintenance Guide Part Number 900 0382 01 Rev AA Page 25 Please address all questions regarding the 3Com software to your authorized 3Com representative VCX SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW The 3Com VCX IP Telephony Solution delivers reliable highly scalable comprehensive standards based IP telephony for large enterprises This chapter provides an overview of the VCX system and the steps required to maintain the servers and services in a VCX environment This chapter includes the following topics m Network based Telephony m VCX Software Components m VCX Hardware Configurations m VCX Maintenance Tasks m About VCX Passwords m VCX File and Directory Name Guidelines 16 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW Network based Telephony The VCX IP Telephony Solution referred to in this guide as the VCX system merges telephony with networking by delivering business telephone service over a data network The VCX architecture provides a distributed call processing system using the SIP signalling protocol to establish voice video and text sessions between SIP phones and other SIP compatible devices The syste
49. edit and delete trusted endpoints for a Call Processor Trusted endpoints do not need to have a port specified An IP address if present in the trusted endpoint list is trusted independently of the port To see the current list of trusted endpoints Log onto the server hosting the Call Processor Enter the following commands to start the remoteCli interface cd opt 3com VCX callprocessor remoteCli bin remoteCli callprocessor Enter the following command to list the trusted end points show cctrusted Output from this command is similar to the following CcTrusted Index RowStatus TrustedAddress Netmask 1 1 10 230 64 5 255725571255255 2 1 10 230 63 7 255 255 255 255 3 1 10 230 63 15 255 255 255 255 4 1 2b55 255 255 255 To add a trusted endpoint to a Call Processor using the CLI 1 Log onto the server hosting the Call Processor 2 Navigate to the opt 3com VCX callprocessor remoteCli bin 144 CHAPTER 9 CONFIGURING THE CALL PROCESSOR 3 Start the remoteCLl interface remoteCli callprocessor 4 Add either a single or range of trusted endpoints a To add a single trusted endpoint from the prompt gt enter config CcTrusted rowStatus 4 index lt index ID TrustedAddress IP address of endpoint b To add a range of trusted endpoints using abbreviated variables at the prompt enter config cct row 4 index lt index ID trustedaddr lt IP address of endpoint gt netmask lt IP address of netmask gt
50. either two servers or four servers m Ina two server configuration each server runs IP Telephony server software and IP Messaging server software wm Ina four server configuration one pair of servers runs IP Telephony server software the second pair of servers runs IP Messaging server software Follow the procedure in this section to upgrade the two server configuration at a single site from VCX software version 6 0 to version 7 0 All upgrade commands are executed locally at the console Before you begin the upgrade procedures on the primary VCX server and on the secondary VCX server perform these steps Log in as root on the primary VCX server and on the secondary VCX server Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary VCX server and then on the secondary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Drop database replication on the primary VCX server by entering these commands Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers 259 cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication The drop replication script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id prompt appears Enter site ID configured for this system For single site systems the site ID is identical for both the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press
51. entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc 4 Upgrade the secondary IP Messaging server by following the procedure described in step 3 However unlike the primary IP Messaging server upgrade the system will not prompt you about support for IP Messaging clients If the primary IP Messaging server was configured with the client information the secondary IP Messaging server is automatically configured with this information This section describes how to upgrade regional Call servers Call servers are typically installed in redundant pairs primary and secondary in a multi site VCX system You need to perform the steps in this section on a console attached to each Call server in all regions Region 1 and Region 2 in this example To upgrade the Call servers Log on as root to the primary Call server and the secondary Call server in a region Obtain a copy of the vex callserver 7 0 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary Call server and on the secondary Call server 3 Upgrade the primary Call server by following these steps a Start the upgrade process by entering the following commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcox callserver 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade 284 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V
52. for version 7 1 x to version 7 1 y upgrades Appendix C for version 6 0 to version 7 0 upgrades Downgrade VCX system software Downgrade VCX system software to the last Appendix D previously installed release The tasks in Table 4 are performed by executing commands on the appropriate VCX server Commands can be executed either locally through a console terminal attached to the server or remotely through a Secure Shell SSH session See to Appendix E for a description of the VCX commands you can use to manage and view VCX components For information on replacing a VCX server disk refer to the VCX Installation Guide About VCX Passwords The commands you execute to perform the maintenance tasks described in this guide require logging in to a server using the appropriate VCX system account The username and default password for each account is shown in Table 5 Table 5 VCX System Accounts Username Default Password root pvadmin oracle oracle tomcat tomcat cworks cworks VCX VCX app nice During the VCX installation procedure the installer has the option to change the default password for each account 3Com Corporation strongly recommends for security reasons that installers change the 24 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW A default passwords Consult with your VCX installer for the current passwords Note that these passwords can be changed after the initial installation by runni
53. important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc Set Up Database Replication 1 Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 231 Follow the steps in this section to set up database replication Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary IP Telephony server and then on the secondary IP Telephony server by entering these commands log in as root cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Set up replication on the primary IP Telephony server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for this system For single site systems the site ID is identical for both the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press Enter to accept the default C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of ethO on the primary VCX server d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address o
54. in your local VCX system or the status of a UPS in a remote VCX system You can enter the command on the master server or any slave server The vex ups status command uses the following syntax vex ups status ups0 ups1 master ip parameter You must identify the UPS you want to monitor For a single UPS system enter upso For a dual UPS system enter either upso or ups1 depending on the UPS you want to monitor The parameter master ip is optional Use this parameter to specify the IP address of a remote VCX UPS master server In addition to the required parameter upso Or ups1 you must enter one of the parameters shown in Table 10 Table 10 vcx ups status Command Parameters Parameter Description upsstatus Indicates the status of the UPS for example online or offline upsload Indicates the load expressed in watts placed on the UPS by the attached VCX servers upsmfr Displays the name of the UPS manufacturer In this case the value is always APC batterycharge Indicates as a percentage the current battery charge upsserial Displays the manufacturer s serial number of the UPS upsmodel Displays the manufacturer s model name of the UPS isconfig Indicates whether or not Y or N the UPS has been configured Monitoring UPS Status 137 Table 10 vox ups status Command Parameters continued Parameter Description ismaster Indicates whether or not Y or N this VCX serv
55. is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all the other branch office servers in Region 1 To upgrade the branch offices in Region 2 global messaging Log in to the first branch office server as root Obtain a copy of the vex softswitch 7 1 yc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the branch office server The variable y indicates the version of VCX software for example Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 249 vex all 7 1 3c tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number To start the upgrade process enter the following commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcox softswitch 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are SkreGearcs she sssoms Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 yc is now available Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the sys
56. localhost access log 2006 08 08 txt There is currently no mechanism in place to roll over these files or limit file Size You can either move the older versions of these files to another server for storage or delete them You should closely monitor the following IP Messaging log file m ums cbipi log located in the usr app cbipi directory This file grows indefinitely and if it reaches the operating system limit can prevent IP Messaging from taking calls Growth rate depends on the call load on the system Restarting IP Messaging does not reset the file you must either move ums cbipi log to another server for storage or delete the file CDR File Maintenance Managing Log and CDR Files 49 wm Additional IP Messaging files you should periodically examine include a usr app gen app out a usr app gen eml client out a usr app gen cpy4 out Each of these files resets after a restart of IP Messaging Consequently these files will not grow too large unless the system is extremely busy or the system runs without a restart for a long period of time months Storage of CDRs is not an issue if your VCX system includes a dedicated server running the Call Records service In this case the Call Records service off loads CDRs from each configured Accounting service see Call Records Service Overview If however your VCX system does not include a Call Records service CDRs continually accumulate on each server running the Accounting
57. logged in as root cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start 8 Start the Tomcat process on the primary Call server and the secondary Call server in each region by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat start Upgrading the Regional IP Messaging Servers Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 281 This section describes how to upgrade regional IP Messaging servers These servers may provide messaging services for users connected to the regional office local messaging Or the servers may provide messaging services for users connected to the regional office and to users connected to one or more supported branch offices global messaging In either case you need to perform the steps in this section on a console attached to each IP Messaging server in all regions Region 1 and Region 2 in this example IP Messaging servers are typically configured in pairs with one server acting as the primary and the other acting as the secondary The primary IP Messaging server and a secondary IP Messaging server may be located in the same region or in different regions To upgrade the IP Messaging servers Stop the primary IP Messaging server and a secondary IP Messaging server by entering the following commands as root on each server cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop Obtain a copy of the vex ipmsg 7 0 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt install
58. monitoring N 10 11 Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 195 If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts After completing the UPS Monitoring prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Enter the following commands to stop the Authentication and Directory server on Region 1 cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop To upgrade the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 Log in as root to the Call server in Region 2 Stop the Tomcat process by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Log in as root to the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 4 Ensure that database replication
59. new backup The new backup is created in the opt 3com VCX backup prerestore directory You can prevent the restore operation from creating the new backup by using the vex config restore command with the nobackup option The restore operation replaces the existing configuration with the configuration data in the backup file This means the restore operation may also remove existing configuration data As noted in Backing Up a 76 CHAPTER 4 BACKING UP AND RESTORING A VCX CONFIGURATION VCX Configuration some configuration files and directories may be designated as optional Optional files and directories are backed up if present when the vex config backup command is executed Optional files configured after the backup operation are removed during the restore operation Similarly the content of a directory backup replaces in full the content of the directory at the time of the restore This may include the removal of any extra files which were added since the backup was created To avoid losing configuration data perform a backup operation whenever you change or add to a VCX system configuration To restore a VCX configuration backup file 1 Log in using the root account to the machine hosting the VCX configuration you want to restore 2 Enter the following command vex config restore optional arguments lt backup filename gt If you do not specify a path for the lt backup filename gt the command looks for the backup file i
60. operating system version This step describes To SU Downgrading from 7 1 y to 7 1 x 311 how to determine if a new operating system version was installed and if so how to revert to the previous version The examples in this step use the assumption that upgrading from version 7 1 x to 7 1 y changed the operating system version from 4 2 0 to 4 2 1 a Login as root b To determine which operating system versions are available enter this command vcex os query The output from this command appears OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 0 dev hda2 A B 4 2 1 dev hda3 B active The operating system versions that you see may vary from the example shown The order of the A and B versions may be reversed depending on the upgrade history of the system When you are downgrading use the earlier of the two operating system versions in this command vex os switch 4 2 0 To confirm that you have selected the operating system version that you want repeat the vex os query command Verify that the word selected appears in the Status column for the version that you want Example OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 0 dev hda2 A selected B 4 2 1 dev hda3 B active Reboot the system using this command reboot When the system reboots it starts VCX 7 1 x services 312 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE p Downgrading the Call Records Server The Call Records server is a stand alone server it h
61. or the Call Processor Service using the Common Agent which is installed by default on all VCX servers The Common Agent is normally running but can be stopped and started using the console terminal or a Secure Shell SSH remote login connection 52 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS Starting the Common Agent Stopping the Common Agent gt To start the Common Agent Log in using the root account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX commagent vcx scripts init d commagent start you can stop the Common Agent using operating system commands or using EMS The Accounting Service acctxml Authentication and Directory Service vcxdata Call Records Service bssxml and the Call Processing Server callp cannot be viewed from EMS when the Common Agent is stopped Using Operating System Commands To stop the Common Agent using operating system commands Log in to the server running the Common Agent you want to stop using the root account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX commagent vcx scripts init d commagent stop Using EMS Use EMS to stop the Common Agent immediately or gracefully To stop the Common Agent immediately From the Explorer tab right click 3Com SNMP Agent From the pop up menu select Maintenance then select Hard Shutdown To stop the Common Agent gracefully From the Explorer tab right click 3Com SNMP Agent From the pop up menu select Maintenance then select Graceful
62. primary IP Messaging server and no client configuration prompts will appear a lf you enter Y this system will be configured as an IP Messaging server and you will be asked to identify the IP Messaging clients associated with this server The following prompts appear A list of each of the IPMSG client systems IP addresses and hostnames is required Enter a blank input to indicate that all clients have been entered IP address of IPMSG client 1 Client IP Address a Enter the IP address of the first IP Messaging client system The following prompts appear Hostname of IPMSG client 1 Client Hostname b Enter the hostname of the first IP Messaging client system You can identify 20 IP Messaging client systems The client configuration prompts appear until you reach the maximum 20 entries or until you press Enter without entering a IP address When you finish identifying IP Messaging client systems the following prompt appears Do you wish to change any of the IP Messaging Service parameters N c Press Enter to accept the default answer N If you enter Y the script presents each of the items that you entered and allows you to accept the value or change it The system reboots After the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 x IP Messaging services 6 After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The sy
63. prompt At the prompt enter the name of the Accounting service you want to update The Enter Old Password for Username cworks prompt appears At the prompt enter the password for the cworks user after the asterisks An asterisk appears at the Password prompts Enter and re enter the password for the user default username is cworks The cworks in the bracket after the prompt is not the default password You must enter the correct password for the user If nothing except the Enter key is given an Deleting an Accounting Service from a Group Adding Accounting Services to the Call Records Service 35 empty password is accepted which is probably not the correct password for that user cworks on the Accounting service The Do you want to Update Password prompt appears Re enter the password already assigned for the cworks user Do not try to change a password here The Update Source Address prompt appears Enter the IP Address of the server you need to edit The Update Source Path prompt appears The default is opt 3com VCX acctxml db export This is the location where the CDRs are is stored on the Accounting service The new configuration is applied and you are returned to the main menu This option allows you to delete an Accounting service from a group Once an Accounting service is deleted from a group any CDRs that are generated will be stored on the Accounting service To delete an Accounting service
64. safe location If any VCX server experiences a disk or other failure that requires reinstallation of the VCX software the license key file must be available for that process Installing a License Key File To install a license key log on to the server as root and enter the following commands cd opt installtemp vex licenseinstall license key filename These confirmation messages indicates that the license key has been successfully installed Activation Key Successfully Validated Success Activation key validated and installed The license key is installed in the opt3com 1icenses directory and the activation key is symbolically linked to the license key file as shown in the following example ls 1 258 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 total 8 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 63 Jun 15 2006 activation key gt opt 3com licenses SNAm Fro7 vrJa YKhH H8az db7Q activation key rw r r 1 root root 1792 Jun 15 2006 SNAm Fro7 vrJa YKhH H8az db7Q activation key CAUTION Do not edit this file The activation key file content is signed If you edit this file you will invalidate it You can use the vex licensequery a11 command to display information about the currently installed VCX software license for example serial number customer name expiration date and number of supported phone and IP Messaging clients Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers Single site VCX systems can have
65. serve Log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat start n Restart the Authentication and Directory service on each region s Authentication and Directory server Log in to each server as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start Verifying Replication at a Branch Office p Database replication between a branch office and the regional office associated with the branch is started automatically when VCX software is installed on the branch This section describes how to verify that replication is enabled For replication of branch databases the host Regional data server of the branch office is always the Master Definition Site Use the following procedure to verify the branch office replication with the host Regional VCX Authentication and Directory server Login on the branch office for which you want to verify replication as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin checkReplication The script starts to run The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id appears 2 Enter the site ID of the branch office you are logged into Verifying the Number of VCX Data Schemas in a Region 97 The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears To determine the number of Master Sites associated with this branch use the istVcxdata command See Manually Configuring Replication for an
66. service details are displayed and you are returned to the main menu Managing CDRs and Super CDRs Understanding CDR Fields Call Detail Records CDRs are generated by the call processor and stored on the Accounting service in an XML file format A Super CDR consists of one or more individual CDRs that have been merged into one XML file A Super CDR may have part or all of the fields listed in an individual CDR depending on what information was needed during a call CDRs can be sent to the VCX Call Reports application see the VCX Administration Guide This application allows you to view export and create reports based on retrieved CDRs Each CDR and Super CDR XML file consists of HTML tags that are used to identify specific variables See Table 7 for the names of the variables associated with the HTML tags and the CDR field descriptions and values Table 7 CDR Field Descriptions and Values Tag Variable Description and Values Example a0 VERSIONID Indicates version ID of the CDR N A For internal use only a4 SERVICETYPE Indicates service type used N A For internal use only a6 SOURCEIDENTIFIER Identifies the Source of the CDR 16 which can only be the call processor 16 call processor a7 SESSIONID Indicates the session identifier N A For internal use only a8 TOTALNUMBERCALLATTEMPTSPERSES The total number of call attempts 8 made per session a9 SESSIONSEQUENCENUM Indicates when a session sequen
67. set up in the VCX system See the VCX Installation Guide for information on configuring a fail over call route point Also refer to your gateway documentation 216 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SoFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y Verifying Software Versions This section describes how to verify the software versions of individual components and entire releases Verifying Component Software Versions To verify what the component software versions are Log onto the VCX system as root 2 Navigate to opt 3com VCX scripts 3 Enter this command vex assemble validate This lists all of the components and their software versions that comprise the current running assembly Verifying Release Software Version For any version of VCX software you can determine the release running on the system by following these steps Log onto the VCX system as root Enter the following commands cd opt 3com ls 1 This command returns a list all of the installed releases and indicates the running VCX version The running VCX version is preceded by a symbolic link icon 5 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 21 May 12 09 13 VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 1c drwxr xr x 10 root root 4096 May 10 07 13 VCX 7 1 0c In this example the link points to version 7 1 1c The other listed release 7 1 0c is installed but not running For VCX systems running version 7 0 or higher you can log in as root and enter the following command vex listversions T
68. stop On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication When the script prompts you enter the site ID of the Master Site Verify Database Replication Wait at least 20 minutes to allow time for database replication to be completed Enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin checkReplication The message that appears should contain the word NORMAL If it does not wait for a few more minutes and then repeat the command Do not proceed beyond this point until you see the NORMAL message Switch Operating System version The upgrade from 7 0 to 7 1 may or may not have required the installation of a new version of the VCX operating system This procedure describes how to determine if a new operating system version was installed and if so how to revert to the previous version 304 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE gt yy The examples in this procedure use the assumption that upgrading from version 7 0 to 7 1 changed the operating system version from 4 2 1 to 5 1 3 Log in as root To determine which operating system versions are available enter this command vex os query The output from this command appears OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 1 dev hda2 A B 5 1 3 dev hda3 B active The operating system versions that you see may vary from the example shown The order of the A and B ver
69. such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are uM EE eue REEE Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable UPS Monitoring The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N Set Up Database Replication 1 Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 187 If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts After completing the UPS Monitoring prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process
70. system Log in as root to the Call servers in each region A typical configuration includes a primary Call server and secondary Call server in each region Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary Call server and then on the secondary Call server in each region by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop 3 Login as root to the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 276 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 4 Stop database replication by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication The drop replication script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for this system b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE prompt appears Enter the number of Master sites To determine the number of Master Sites associated with this office use the istVcxdata command See Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Telephony and Messaging Server for more information C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site If there are more than one Master Sites this question repeats unti
71. systems the site ID is identical for both the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press Enter to accept the default C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of ethO on the primary VCX server d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address of ethO on the secondary VCX server e The Do you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears 178 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 Enter y to continue The script executes During script execution messages appear describing the replication setup Messages also appear stating that firewall setup should allow communication between the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server These messages are a reminder firewall setup was performed during VCX software installation f TheHave you executed the ABOVE mentioned VCX FIREWALL steps y n prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes When the replication is complete Multi Master Replication Status is reported as NORMAL Do not continue to the next step until the replication is complete Note that r
72. that the master slave designation is entirely independent of any role primary secondary or branch that a VCX server may have within the VCX environment As described in VCX Software Components VCX software can be installed on VCX servers in many different configurations When selecting a VCX server to act as a master follow these guidelines m Choose a server that is running the VCX Authentication and Directory service preferred or the IP Messaging service The Authentication and Directory service can run on any of the following VCX servers see Table 3 a IP Telephony and IP Messaging Server a IP Telephony Server a Authentication and Directory Server m The master can be either the primary or the secondary server For example your VCX system includes a region with an IP Messaging Server an Authentication and Directory Server a Call Server and a Call Records Server and the servers share a UPS In this case select the Authentication and Directory Server as the master However if your VCX system includes a UPS powered Call Server and IP Messaging Server select the IP Messaging Server as the master Requirements Adding Single UPS Device Support Adding UPS Support to an Existing VCX System 127 Setting up a VCX system to use UPS power and to monitor UPS status using the vex ups setup command requires the following configuration information for each UPS in the VCX system m P address of the UPS You must know the p
73. the Authentication and Directory server on Region 1 cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop 238 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y To upgrade the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 Log in as root to the Call server in Region 2 Stop the Tomcat process by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Log in as root to the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 4 Ensure that database replication has no errors see Preliminary Steps and then drop replication by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication The drop replication script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter the site ID configured for Region 2 b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE prompt appears Enter the number of Master sites To determine the number of Master sites associated with this server use the istVcxdata command See Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Telephony and Messaging Server for more information In this example there is one Master site Region 1 C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on this server the Authe
74. the Call Processor Note Massage Tracing should only be used for short time intervals since it affects the Call Processor s performance due to unnecessary overhead help Lists all of the possible commands that can be used which are listed in this table plugins Lists all of the plugin modules installed for the Call Processor CLI Command Descriptions 339 INDEX A Accounting service 17 28 adding to the Call Records service 32 deleting from a group 35 editing information in a group 34 listing 36 logging 59 maintenance 56 starting 57 stopping 57 view status 57 viewing details 36 Accounting service configuration file modifying 49 Accounting service groups 28 29 adding 30 configuring 29 deleting 31 disabling 31 enabling 31 viewing 30 viewing details 30 adding Accounting service group 30 Accounting services to the Call Records service 32 adhoc conferencing set up during upgrade 170 app out monitoring 49 authentication and directory server database backup and restore 80 Authentication and Directory service logging 59 maintenance 56 starting 57 stopping 57 view status 57 B backing up databases 80 VCX configurations 70 batch mode user MAC command 150 besbulkload pl 87 branch offices verifying replication 96 C cache clearing for Tomcat 47 Call Detail Record See CDR Call Processor service 16 restarting 55 starting 54 stopping 55 Call Records service 17 28 adding Accounting
75. the procedure is the same as that described in Downgrading a Single Site System 7 1 y to 7 1 x with one difference Each Authentication and Directory server contains a database schema for each region For each schema you must m Drop database replication m Restore the database from the backup file m Reestablish database replication Downgrading Regional IP Messaging Servers If a downgrade is required on a regional IP Messaging server follow the procedure described in Downgrading a Single Site System 7 1 y to 7 1 x Downgrading Call Servers To downgrade a pair of Call servers perform these steps first on the primary server and then on the secondary server Log in as root and switch the VCX version using this command vex switchversion manual 7 x Example vex switchversion manual 7 1 0c The vex switchversion command m Stops VCX services m Changes a link to point to the requested VCX version m Issues a warning that databases must be restored CAUTION Do not reboot the system or restart VCX services until databases have been restored The VCX 7 1 x version has been selected but the databases still contain 7 1 y versioned data This combination will not operate successfully Update the pointer to the configuration file using this command SetConfigFile opt 3com VCX conf VCXConfiguration xml Switch operating system version The upgrade from 7 1 x to 7 1 y may or may not have required the installation of a new VCX
76. the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc 246 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y Upgrading the Regional Call Records Server 4 Upgrade the secondary Call server by following the procedure described in step 3 This section describes how to upgrade regional the Call Records server In a multi site VCX system a single Call server typically supports all regional offices You need to perform the steps in this section on a console attached to the regional Call server To upgrade the Call Records server Log in to the Call Records server as root Obtain a copy of the vex bss 7 1 yc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Call Records server Enter these commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcox bss 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status mes
77. transaction values in your XML input file when the transaction value in your file is empty The substituted parameter value depends on the parameter m For parameters such as zip the default value specified in user MAC defaults xml 00000 is used if your file does not specify a value m For parameters such as lt email gt the default value specified in user MAC defaults xml iS BLANK In these cases if your file does not specify a value the value grax translates to a empty field m For the parameters first and 1ast the default value specified in user MAC defaults xml is UNAME In these two cases if your file does not specify a value the value for uname is used The value for UNAME is a mandatory user supplied value that specifies the name of the user account m The phone profile lt pprofile gt parameter value is the name string associated with a particular phone profile When this parameter is set to blank in both the input XML and the default XML file VCX software creates a default phone profile This is not recommended Ask your VCX administrator for the name of the default phone profile You can edit user MAC defaults xml to change a default parameter value For example you could change the default value 12345 for phonepass to some other standard value for example 999 You can use a comma separated value CSV file as input to the user MAC command Transactions in the file can add user accounts but not m
78. verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Follow the steps in this section to set up database replication Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary IP Telephony server and then on the secondary IP Telephony server by entering these commands log in as root cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Set up replication on the primary IP Telephony server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for this system For single site systems the site ID is identical for both the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server 188 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press Enter to accept the default The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Defi
79. wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc Stop the Authentication and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the secondary VCX server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the secondary VCX server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx all 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers 223 The system displays several status messages The last two messages are ASSESS SASS RS SS SRS Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 yc is now available Set Up Database Replication 1 Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 y services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 op
80. xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 x install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File Install the license key See Installing a License Key File Change to the new software version by entering this command vex switchversion 7 0 xc The system displays several status messages and then reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 xc Authentication and Directory service After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc Enter the following commands to stop the Authentication and Directory server on Region 2 cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 279 At this point you have upgraded the Authentication and Directory server on Region 1 and Region 2 and you have stopped database replicati
81. you enter the user MAC command with modify plus the uname parameter and the new uname parameter You cannot use the user mac command with the modify to change the value of the site id parameter However the site id parameter is required in modify mode if you want to change account parameters for a user who is not located in the default site the site on which you are logged in Single User Mode This section describes the user mac command syntax for the add modify Command Syntax and delete modes Optional parameters appear in brackets Single user Add mode uses the following command syntax user MAC uname User Name phone Phone Number password Password title Title first First Name middle Middle Name last Last Name email Email Address streetl Street Address1 street2 Street Address2 city City Name stateprov State Or Province country Country Name zip Zip Code site id Site Id remote Host IP Addr pprofile Phone Profile Name Single user Delete mode uses the following command syntax user MAC delete uname User Name site id Site Id remote Host IP Addr Single user Modify mode uses the following command syntax user MAC mod uname User Name new uname New User Name password Password title Title first First Name middle Middle Name last Last Name email Email Address streetl Street Address1 street2 Street Address2
82. 0 63 7 Note that you must include all the vex ups setup command parameters even if you are only changing a single value By default when you configure UPS support on a VCX server monitoring is enabled You can disable UPS monitoring on the master VCX server or on any slave servers Disabling UPS monitoring does not remove or modify the UPS configuration parameters entered with the vcx ups setup command CAUTION Disabling UPS monitoring blocks communication between the VCX server and the UPS If UPS monitoring is disabled and the power fails the VCX server runs on UPS battery power until the battery charge reaches 0 If this happens the VCX server will not perform an orderly shutdown To disable UPS monitoring on a VCX server the master or any slave Log in using the root account to the VCX server on which you want to disable UPS monitoring Enter the following command vex ups setup disableupstools fullauto 136 CHAPTER 8 MANAGING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES The optional argument u11auto specifies that the command should run in automatic mode In this mode command execution does not provide any interactive prompts or queries Note that you can enter the vex ups setup command with the optional help argument to display information on command usage Monitoring UPS Status This section describes how to check the status of a UPS You can use the vex ups status command to check the status of any UPS
83. 1 street2 city State country zip site remote pprofile lt ATTLIST transaction type mod delete lt ELEMENT uname lt ELEMENT phone PCDATA gt PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT newPhone PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT newUname PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT password PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT title lt ELEMENT first PCDATA gt PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT middle PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT last lt ELEMENT email lt ELEMENT streeti lt ELEMENT street2 PCDATA gt PCDATA gt PCDATA gt PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT city PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT state lt ELEMENT country lt ELEMENT zip PCDATA gt PCDATA gt PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT site PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT remote PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT pprofile PCDATA gt Sample XML Input File Format IMPLIED gt The following sample XML input file is based on the DTD file shown in the previous section XML Input File DTD The sample shows one add transaction one modify transaction and one delete transaction lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt DOCTYPE user MAC transactions gt Using Batch Mode 159 user MAC transactions transaction lt uname gt value lt uname gt lt phone gt value lt phone gt lt password gt value lt password gt lt titlesvalue lt title gt lt first gt value lt first gt lt middle gt value lt middle gt lt las
84. 1 xc tar SOftware upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Authentication and Directory server The variable x indicates the version of VCX software for example vex a11 7 0 3c tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number 7 Enter these commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx dataserver 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 x install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Aen ia eaae Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available 8 Change to the new software version by entering this command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable UPS Monitoring 9 The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS
85. 6 0 TO V7 0 Upgrading the Regional Call Records Server The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available b Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File c Install the license key See Installing a License Key File d Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vcx switchversion 7 0 xc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 x Call server e After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc Upgrade the secondary Call server by following the procedure described in step 3 Repeat steps for the other regions in your VCX system This section describes how to upgrade regional Call Records server In a multi site VCX system a single Call server typically supports all regional offices You need to perform the steps
86. 7 0 7c before upgrading to version 7 1 All components in a VCX system must run the same version of VCX software This requirement has the following implications m You cannot upgrade or downgrade one component in a VCX system and not upgrade or downgrade the other system components m If you add a server to an existing VCX system for example a branch office the VCX components on the new server must be installed with the same version of the VCX software as the existing components CAUTION 3Com Corporation strongly recommends that you perform backups of your VCX system on a regular basis for example weekly These backups should include provisioning database and voicemail database content m See Chapter 5 for information on backing up the provisioning data stored in the VCX Authentication and Directory server database m See the IP Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for information on backing up voicemail and other IP Messaging data In addition BEFORE you upgrade your VCX system to a new release perform these backups again If the upgrade fails and you must downgrade you can restore data from these backups as part of the downgrade procedure 168 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 Preliminary Steps Post Upgrade Considerations Prior to performing any upgrade you should check the following m Check the configuration type of the system you are going to upgrade The upgra
87. 96 After the initial master VCX server configuration you can change a parameter value by reentering the vex ups setup command In the following example the low battery threshold charge is changed to 5096 vex ups setup master Y monitormultipleups N upsipaddr 10 230 63 3 community private bcharge 50 Adding UPS Support to an Existing VCX System 129 Note that you must include all the vex ups setup command parameters even if you are only changing a single value Single UPS System Configuring a Slave VCX Server To enable and configure a VCX server as a slave in a single UPS system Log in using the root account to the VCX server you want to designate as a slave Enter the following command vex ups setup configuration parameters You must concatenate the following vex ups setup command configuration parameters responses are shown in bold master N Enter N you must uppercase to indicate that this server is not the master monitormultipleups N Enter N you must uppercase to indicate there is a single UPS servicing the entire VCX system upsserver IP Address of the master Enter the IP address assigned to ethO of the VCX server acting as the master UPS monitor Use dotted decimal notation but do not enter leading zeros For example enter 10 230 63 3 not 010 230 063 003 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all the other VCX servers in your system that you want to function as slaves The following
88. Agent 52 Restarting the Common Agent 53 Managing the Call Processor Service 54 Verifying the Call Processor Status 54 Starting the Call Processor 54 Stopping the Call Processor 55 Restarting the Call Processor 55 Managing the Accounting Service and the Authentication and Directory Service 56 Viewing Service Status 57 Starting a Service 57 Stopping a Service 57 Restarting a Service 58 Enabling Message Tracing 58 Enabling Server Logging 59 SNMP Support 59 Managing the SIP Phone Downloader 61 Starting the SIP Phone Downloader 61 Stopping the SIP Phone Downloader 61 Restarting the SIP Phone Downloader 61 Managing the IP Messaging Service 62 Verifying IP Messaging Service Status 62 Starting the IP Messaging Service 62 Stopping the IP Messaging Service 62 Restarting the IP Messaging Service 62 Managing Authorized SNMP Station Access 63 Changing Codecs 64 How to Change Your Codec 65 Converting Prompts and Messages to a Different Codec 66 BACKING UP AND RESTORING A VCX CONFIGURATION VCX Configuration Backup and Restore Overview 70 VCX Configuration Backup File Contents 70 Backup and Restore Considerations 71 Backing Up a VCX Configuration 72 About the Backup File 73 Examining a Backup File 74 Restoring a VCX Configuration 75 Backup and Restore Operation Logs 77 MANAGING AUTHENTICATION AND DIRECTORY SERVICE DATABASES Backing Up and Restoring the Authentication and Directory Server Database 80 Backing Up th
89. CAN 3COfi VCX Maintenance Guide VCX V7000 IP Telephony Solution Convergence Application Suite System Release 7 1 Part Number 900 0382 01 Rev AA Published August 2006 http www 3com com 3Com Corporation 350 Campus Drive Marlborough MA 01752 3064 Copyright 2002 2006 3Com Corporation All Rights Reserved No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work such as translation transformation or adaptation without written permission from 3Com Corporation 3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change 3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty of any kind either implied or expressed including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose 3Com may make improvements or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this documentation at any time If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation it is furnished under a license agreement included with the product as a separate document in the hardcopy documentation or on the removable media in a directory file named LICENSE TXT or LICENSE TXT If you are unable to locate a copy please contact 3Com and a copy will be prov
90. Devices Powering a Single VCX Server UPS UPS i I In this case you designate the single VCX server with dual power supplies as the master As this is a single server VCX system there are no slaves When configuring the master you identify the additional UPS device by specifying its IP address m Two UPS devices can support multiple VCX servers with or without dual power supplies a Inthe most complex configurations there may be multiple servers each with redundant power supplies see Figure 3 Two UPS Adding UPS Support to an Existing VCX System 131 devices are used to provide power For servers with redundant power supplies ensure that each power supply is connected to a different UPS and if possible you should connect each UPS to different mains circuits In this case the servers should all remain operational unless both UPS devices are on battery and at or below the low battery threshold At this point a coordinated shutdown of all systems must be performed Figure 3 Two UPS Devices Powering Two VCX Servers Server m UPS UPS l VCX Server E In this case you designate one of the VCX servers as the master for both UPS devices and any other VCX servers in the system as slaves When configuring the master you identify the additional UPS device by specifying its IP address a lf your VCX system includes multiple UPS devices the servers
91. E INTERVAL is set to 96 hours four days by default A smaller value initiates the self cleaning more often A larger value allows the CDRs to remain on the Accounting server longer Save your changes You can also configure the Accounting service to be self cleaning by modifying the tbes xml cdr mib variables m itbesCdrAutoCleanIfLatestStale m itbesCdrAutoCleanIfLatestStalePeriod Management of QDRs storage is similar to CDR management except that QDR generation is disabled by default see QoS Monitoring Statistics and QDRs are not collected by the Call Records service You can however configure the Accounting service to be self cleaning by editing the Accounting service configuration file or modifying the appropriate SNMP MIB variables To modify the Accounting service configuration file Log in to the server running the Accounting service using the root account Enter the following command cd opt 3com VCX acctxml conf Use an editor to open the following file acctxmlconfig xml In the CONFIGURATION INFO section locate the lt BES_QOSFILE_CONFIG gt subsection and find the following variables AUTO CLEAN IF NO LATEST UPDATE N AUTO CLEAN IF NO LATEST UPDATE INTERVAL 96 The first variable determines whether or not QDRs are purged By default the variable AUTO CLEAN IF NO LATEST UPDATE is Set to N Verifying Service Operation 51 If you enable generation of QoS statistics and QDRs change t
92. EAK 1 1 1386 rpm 66 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS Converting Prompts and Messages to a Different Codec 4 Enter the following command to switch to the directory containing the add language and change codec utilities cd usr app app dir Enter the following command to run the add language utility add language Enter the appropriate response to the prompt to add UK English language prompts Enter the following command to run the change codec utility change codec g729a Stop and restart IP Messaging by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX UMS vcx scripts init d S60ums stop S60ums start Log in to the secondary IP Messaging server and repeat steps 2 through 8 Note that steps 5 and 6 may be optional If in the example you were changing to the G 729a codec with US English language prompts steps 5 and 6 would be unnecessary because the US English prompts are already enabled IP Messaging supports only one codec at a time and operates with the G 711a codec by default If you want to switch to a different codec for example switch from the default codec to the G729a codec you can run the change codec utility However if you run the change codec utility on an IP Messaging system on which custom prompts have been recorded and voice mail messages have been saved in the previous codec format those prompts and messages will be lost To preserve existing custom prompts and voice mail messages run th
93. Enter to accept the default C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of the primary VCX server d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address of the secondary VCX server e Thepno you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes Enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Stop IP Messaging first on the primary VCX server and then on the secondary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop Obtain a copy of the vex a11 7 0 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary VCX server and on the secondary VCX server The variable x indicates the version of VCX software for example vex a11 7 0 3c tar that will replace version 6 0 The letter c is always appended to the version number 260 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 Upgrading the Primary VCX Server Next execute the following steps in the order listed m Upgrade the primary VCX server See Upgrading the Primary VCX Server a Upgrade the secondary VCX server See Upgrading the S
94. Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS must be installed and then configured through the IP Messaging administrator configuration interface before enabling global voicemail integration on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers Refer to the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for more information and for configuration options Once you have installed and configured a GVCS you can add existing IP Messaging servers to the Global Voicemail Integration system by running the vex reconfigure command on each server see Chapter 7 IP Messaging servers are typically configured in pairs with one server acting as the primary and the other acting as the secondary The primary IP Messaging server and a secondary IP Messaging server may be located in the same region or in different regions To upgrade the IP Messaging servers 1 Stop the primary IP Messaging server and a secondary IP Messaging server by entering the following commands as root on each server cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop 2 Obtain a copy of the vex ipmsg 7 1 yc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary IP Messaging server and on the secondary IP Messaging server 3 Upgrade the primary IP Messaging server by following these steps a Start the upgrade process by entering the following commands cd opt installtemp 244 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y
95. Guide for details When you upgrade a primary IP Messaging server running version 6 0 IP Messaging software to version 7 0 the upgrade script asks if you want the system to support IP Messaging client systems If you answer yes you must be prepared to enter the IP addresses of each client system m Call server software Supported on multi site systems configured on regional offices with branch offices m Call Records server software Supported on multi site systems configured on a single server for regional offices with or without branch offices m Authentication and Directory server software Supported on multi site systems configured on regional offices with branch offices You should upgrade each server from a locally attached console The upgrade procedure includes a reboot of each upgraded server If you perform an upgrade remotely using a secure shell client for example you will be logged out when the reboot occurs When you log back in it may not be apparent that the upgrade has completed If you enter commands before the upgrade has finished the upgrade will fail After an upgrade to VCX version 7 0 from any release of VCX version 6 0 you must run the configuration script admincfg described in this section The script addresses the following issues m VCX version 7 0 adds a new Manager role to the VCX Administrator provisioning interface Running the script adds the new role to the interface and ensures that admin
96. IP Telephony Server or IP Telephony and Messaging Server on page 91 for more information Enter the number total number of Master Sites including the branch office you are logged on to in this branch office s cluster The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address 10 10 10 10 prompt appears Enter the IP Address of the primary regional server which is the Master Definition Site Depending on the number of Master Sites associated with this branch office you will be prompted with the Enter the MASTER SITE n IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt until all Master Site IP Addresses have been entered Enter the IP Address of each Master Site When the NORMAL Status returned you know the replication is configured This script can take 20 45 minutes to output the status Verifying the Number of VCX Data Schemas in a Region The listVcxdata command lists the Master Definition Site depending on which server this command is issued at and all of the Master Sites in the same cluster as the Master Site you are logged on to Both the Master Definition Site and Master Sites are considered VCX data schemas A Master Definition Site is a primary regional office and a Master Site is any other office regional or branch within the network The listVcxdata command lists the names of the database schemas it does not show the IP addresses of the regional and branch offices For this reason it is helpful to have a unique description fo
97. IP Telephony server Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary IP Telephony server and then on the secondary IP Telephony server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Drop database replication on the primary IP Telephony server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication The drop replication script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 265 Enter site ID configured for this system For single site systems the site ID is identical for both the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press Enter to accept the default C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of the primary IP Telephony server d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address of the secondary IP Telephony server e TheDo you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes Enter the following command to exit the cworks
98. IS GUIDE This guide describes how to maintain 3Com9 VCX IP Telephony Solution software VCX software runs on either the 3Com V6000 or 3Com V7000 server platforms This guide describes how to maintain VCX IP Telephony Solution components which include the VCX software services running in standard VCX software configurations This guide is for operators and administrators of the system and assumes the reader has a thorough understanding of telecommunications VoIP technology database technology and network and system administration operation Many tasks require system administrator privileges Release notes are issued with some products If the information in the release notes differs from the information in this guide follow the instructions in the release notes 12 ABOUT THIS GUIDE Conventions Table 1 and Table 2 Table 1 Notice Icons Icon Notice Type ist conventions that are used throughout this guide Description instructions D gt Information note Information that describes important features or i Caution h Warning Information that alerts you to potential loss of data or potential damage to an application system or device Information that alerts you to potential personal injury Table 2 Text Conventions Convention Description Screen displays This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen Syntax The word syntax means that you must evaluate the syntax p
99. LEMENT street1l PCDATA lt ELEMENT street2 PCDATA lt ELEMENT city PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT state PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT country PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT zip PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT site PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT remote PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT pprofile PCDATA gt gt gt The default values are supplied to user mac command processing in a default XML file named user MAC defaults xm1 which specifies the following defaults lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 lt DOCTYPE user MAC defaults gt lt user MAC defaults gt lt BLANK indicates that the field will be empty gt lt UNAME indicates that the field will contain the user name passed in to the transaction gt lt password gt changeme lt password gt lt phonepass gt 12345 lt phonepass gt lt title gt BLANK lt title gt lt first gt UNAME lt first gt lt middle gt BLANK lt middle gt lt last gt UNAME lt last gt lt email gt BLANK lt email gt lt street1 gt Unknown lt street1 gt lt street2 gt BLANK lt street2 gt Adding User Accounts with a CSV File Using Batch Mode 161 lt city gt Unknown lt city gt lt state gt Unknown lt state gt lt country gt BLANK lt country gt lt zip gt 00000 lt zip gt lt site gt BLANK lt site gt lt remote gt BLANK lt remote gt lt pprofile gt BLANK lt pprofile gt user MAC defaults The default values specified in user MAC defaults xml map to
100. Log on to the VCX server hosting the Call Records service as cworks The Super CDRs are kept in the opt 3com VCX bssxml data Group Name gt outbox directory The newest Super CDR is listed last and looks similar to the following 20050414145513681 xml The file naming convention uses this format Year Month Date Hour Minutes ThreeExtraNumbers gt xml A Super CDR looks similar to this cdr collection cdr 11280990ea1 8cab d911 9410 ac771eb4454 b lt 11 gt lt 04 gt 6 lt 04 gt lt 05511 lt 05 gt lt a0 gt 1 lt a0 gt lt a452 lt a4 gt lt a6 gt 16 lt a6 gt lt a 8 gt 1 lt a8 gt lt a9 gt 1 lt a9 gt lt b3 gt 304001 lt b3 gt lt b6 gt 59843771d lt b6 gt lt b9 gt 333333 lt b9 gt lt e5 gt 1 lt e5 gt lt e6 gt 20050414 19 54 07 lt e6 gt lt 0 gt 20050414 19 54 07 lt 0 gt lt 250 lt 2 gt lt 3 gt 0 lt f 3 gt lt f 45404 lt f 4 gt lt h751 lt h7 gt lt h8 gt 0 lt h8 gt lt j5 gt 2 lt j5 gt lt 01 gt 74000001 lt ol1l gt lt cdr gt lt cdr_collection gt QoS Monitoring Statistics A call processor can also generate Quality of Service QoS statistics You can enable the collection of QoS statistics on a call processor to objectively monitor voice quality in your VCX system You can also use QoS statistics to determine the effect of configuration changes and to identify faulty end points or routes You can enable collection of QoS statistics and view the collected Statistics through the 3Com Enterpr
101. M ELLE Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available 2 Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File 3 Install the license key See Installing a License Key File Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vcx switchversion 7 0 xc Set Up Database Replication 1 Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 271 The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 x IP Messaging services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc Follow the steps in this section to set up database replication Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary IP Telephony server and then on the secondary IP Telephony server by entering these commands log in as root cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Set up replication on the primary IP Telephony server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appea
102. NAGING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES Enter N you must uppercase to indicate there is a single UPS servicing the entire VCX system upsipaddr IP Address of the UPS gt Enter the IP address of the UPS Use dotted decimal notation but do not enter leading zeros For example enter 10 230 63 3 not 010 230 063 003 community community string of the UPS Enter the SNMP community string configured on the UPS to enable communication between the master VCX server and the UPS Typically the community string is private to allow Read or Write access however 3Com Corporation strongly recommends that you change the default community string bcharge UPS battery threshold charge gt Enter UPS battery threshold charge allowed before starting a shutdown of the VCX system The threshold charge is expressed as a percentage of remaining battery power The default is 2596 The range from 25 to 75 The following example shows the syntax required to initially configure a master VCX server vcex ups setup master Y monitormultipleups N upsipaddr 10 230 63 3 community private bcharge 33 When this command is executed UPS monitoring is enabled on the current VCX server The server is designated the master The VCX system will be serviced by a single UPS The IP address of the UPS is 10 230 63 3 The community string the UPS will use to communicate with the master VCX server is private The low battery threshold charge is 33
103. OG WARN ON Y LOG ERROR ON Y LOG SYSTEM ON Y LOG TIME INTERVAL 4 LOG TIMESTAT ON Y NUMBER OF MSG 1000 gt Start the service see Starting a Service The logs are written to the directory that the service is run from opt 3com VCX schema 10g The SNMP Common Agent enabled by default allows back end server recognition by SNMP MIB browsers such as Enterprise Management Suite EMS If you suspect the SNMP Common Agent is not enabled see the following section Verifying SNMP Support 60 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS Verifying SNMP Support To verify that either the acctxmlconfig xml Accounting service or vcxdataconfig xml Authentication and Directory service files are set up for the back end server Log in to the server hosting the service using the root account Enter the following command cd opt 3com VCX lt schema gt conf For schema enter acctxm1 for the Accounting service or enter vexdata for the Authentication and Directory service Open the acctxmlconfig xml file or the vcxdataconfig xml file 4 Find the SNMP Configuration tag verify that the SNMP Common Agent is enabled It should look like this lt Enable or Disable SNMP Common Agent gt M lt Interface 0 OFF 1 ON gt M ENABLED VALUE 1 s If SNMP support is disabled continue with Enabling SNMP Support Enabling SNMP Support To enable SNMP support Log in to the server hosting the serv
104. Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Upgrade the secondary Call server by following steps 3 through 7 This section describes how to upgrade regional the Call Records server In a multi site VCX system a single Call server typically supports all regional offices You need to perform the steps in this section on a console attached to the regional Call server To upgrade the Call Records server 1 Log in to the Call Records server as root 2 Obtain a copy of the vex bss 7 1 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Call Records server 3 Enter these commands 206 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx bss 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are SSeS ssa ese SiS Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available 4 Change to the new software version by entering this command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable UPS Monitoring 5 The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UP
105. P address of the primary Media Gateway 10 230 64 15 In this sample script the IP address of the primary media gateway remains unchanged Press the Enter or Return key to accept the current IP address Sample VCX Server Reconfiguration 113 Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued The secondary Media Gateway is an additional interface between the VCX IP Telephony system and the external telephone network If there is no secondary Media Gateway leave this entry blank IP address of the secondary Media Gateway 10 230 67 15 In this sample script the IP address of the secondary media gateway remains unchanged Press the Enter or Return key to accept the current IP address The Call Records Service consolidates call accounting records for the VCX system It is only enabled on one server for an entire installation Enable the Call Records Service Y N N Press the Enter or Return key to accept the default answer Y The Call Records Service is enabled on only the Primary VCX Server The script displays a summary of the global parameters that you have accepted or changed E Summary of Global Parameters Site Name Testthree Customer Name 3Com Customer European Date Order N Enable Adhoc Conference Service Y SIP Default Dialing Domain 1 1 1 1 Secondary Call Processor 10 230 67 41 Secondary Auth amp Dir Service 10 230 67 40 Secondary IP Messaging Service 10 230 67 40 Pri
106. S can be used with VCX systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts 6 After completing the UPS Monitoring prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few Upgrading Branch Offices Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 207 minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc This section describes how to upgrade branch offices Each branch office is associated with a regio
107. S configuration prompts 5 After completing the Adhoc Conferencing and UPS Monitoring prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the System starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Set Up Database Replication 1 Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers 177 Stop the Authentication and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Follow the steps in this section to set up database replication Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary VCX server and then on the secondary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Set up replication on the primary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for this system For single site
108. See Table 12 for descriptions and values of the configurable parameters Table 12 CcTrusted Configurable Parameter Descriptions When Takes Column Name Description Effect Range Default rowStatus This determines what sort of Once Call 1 active 1 configuration you want to do with a Processor 2 not in service trusted endpoint such as delete or add __ restarted 3 not ready one In order to configure a row you 4 add always need to specify the index 5 create and wait 6 delete index This is the trusted endpoint table s key Once Call 1 through 128 1 and is a unique identifier of a row Processor restarted TrustedAddress Indicates an endpoint to trust Each Once Call For IP Address For IP Address row is for an IP address and port Processor combination By default if only the IP restarted dotted IP string DRM address is supplied the default SIP IP NOTE maximum 15 NOTE must be Port 5060 is assumed To specify the characters configured port simply append a colon to the IP address and add the port number For Port Number LEE O through 65535 5060 netmask Used when you would like to add a Once Call dotted IP string 0 0 0 0 range of trusted endpoints a NOTE maximum 15 characters 5 To exit the Remote CLI application enter exit Editing Trusted Endpoints Deleting Trusted Endpoints Configuring Accounting and Directory Services 145 To edit a trusted endpoint of a Call Processor using the CLI
109. TEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press Enter to accept the default Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers 263 c The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of the primary VCX server d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address of the secondary VCX server e TheDo you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes During script execution messages appear describing the replication setup Messages also appear stating that firewall setup should allow communication between the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server These messages are a reminder firewall setup was performed during VCX software installation f TheHave you executed the ABOVE mentioned VCX FIREWALL steps y n prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes When the replication is complete Multi Master Replication Status is reported as NORMAL Do not continue to the next step until the replication is complete Note that replication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete g You can check the replication by entering the following command checkReplication When the replicat
110. The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y 190 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Denm meme mm Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available 5 Change to the new software version by entering this command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable Adhoc Conferencing and UPS Monitoring 6 The Adhoc Conferencing prompt appears In order to support ad hoc conferences with more than 3 participants the Adhoc Conference Service is used This service should be enabled on this server unless another Server dedicated to Adhoc Conferencing will be used instead If available a separate server typically provides greater capacity and may be shared among sites Use the Adhoc service on this server Y N Y If you want this server to act as a multi caller up to 6 callers conferencing server enter y If not enter n 7 The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs
111. VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 4 To start the upgrade process enter the following commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vex softswitch 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are cepe Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available 5 Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File 6 Install the license key See Installing a License Key File 7 Switch to the new software version by entering the following command 10 p vcx switchversion 7 0 xc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc Repeat steps 2 through 8 for all the other branch office servers in Region 2 After upgrading all the branches restart the Tomcat process on the Call servers in Region 2 by logging in t
112. VCX System with Branch Offices 213 UPS Monitoring requires a network enabled UPS Enter the IP address assigned to the UPS s management card or Ethernet interface Note The UPS must already be configured with this address UPS IP address Enter the IP address assigned to the UPS The upgrade script prompts you for the SNMP write community string assigned to the UPS The SNMP write community string configured in the UPS is required For security reasons it is recommended that the default value provided by the UPS be changed UPS write community string The string you enter here must match the SNMP write community string configured on the UPS If you answered yes in step 1 indicating multiple UPS devices the upgrade script prompts you for the IP address of the second UPS Enter the IP address assigned to the second UPS s management card or Ethernet interface Note The UPS must already be configured with this address Second UPS IP address The upgrade script prompts you for the SNMP write community string assigned to the second UPS The SNMP write community string configured in the second UPS is required Second UPS write community string The string you enter here must match the SNMP write community string configured on the UPS The upgrade script prompts you for the battery charge level expressed as a percentage of battery capacity at which point the attached server or servers should initiate a shutdow
113. a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File 3 Install the license key See Installing a License Key File 4 Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vcx switchversion 7 0 xc 270 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 Upgrading the Secondary IP Messaging Server 1 The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 x IP Telephony services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc Stop the Authentication and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the secondary IP Messaging server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the secondary IP Messaging server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx ipmsg 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are
114. a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts 8 After completing the Adhoc Conferencing and UPS Monitoring prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the System starts VCX 7 1 x services 9 After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 191 ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices Some multi site VCX systems have regional offices and branch offices Each branch office is associated with a regional office Multi site VCX systems can be categorized by the method used to imp
115. able y indicates the version of VCX software for example vex a11 7 1 3c tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number Enter these commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx dataserver 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 y install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 yc is now available Change to the new software version by entering this command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 yc Authentication and Directory service After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX gt opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc Enter the following commands to stop
116. ade the Region 2 database by entering the following commands su cworks cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin upgradeVcxdata The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id prompt appears 2 Enter the Site ID for Region 2 3 On the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 upgrade the Region 1 database by entering the following commands su cworks cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin upgradeVcxdata The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id prompt appears Enter the Site ID for Region 1 5 Set up database replication on Region 1 by entering the following commands you should still be logged in to the Authentication and Directory server as cworks cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for Region 1 b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE prompt appears Enter the number of Master sites To determine the number of Master Sites associated with this office use the istVcxdata command See Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 241 Telephony and Messaging Server for more information In this example there is one Master site Region 2 C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears
117. ading the Primary VCX Server m Upgrade the secondary VCX server See Upgrading the Secondary VCX Server m Setup database replication on the primary VCX server See Set Up Database Replication Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the primary VCX server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the primary VCX server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx all 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y 222 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y Upgrading the Secondary VCX Server The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 yc is now available 2 Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 y services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version
118. age display that shows your VCX system configuration vcx config backup For VCX versions 7 1 and higher backs up the current VCX software and VCX operating system configuration See Backing Up a VCX Configuration vcx config restore For VCX versions 7 1 and higher restores an archived VCX software and VCX operating system configuration See Restoring a VCX Configuration vcx backup query For VCX versions 7 1 and higher displays information about the specified VCX configuration backup file See Examining a Backup File Table 17 lists commands you can use for various installation and removal tasks or to switch between versions of installed VCX software Command Descriptions 331 Table 17 VCX Installation Removal and Switching Commands Command Description vcx install Used to install VCX components Typically invoked as part of a higher level script However you can use this command install a codec See How to Change Your Codec VCX OS query vcx os switch Displays the installed VCX operating systems and if there are multiple systems installed indicates which one is active This command is described in the upgrade and downgrade appendixes Switches between installed versions of the VCX operating system This command is described in the upgrade and downgrade appendixes vcx removeversion Removes an earlier installed version of VCX software vox switchversion Switches between i
119. agement script opt 3com VCX vcxdata conf user MAC transactions dtd This DTD file specifies the structure of XML input files required by the user MAC command user MAC transactions xsl This XSL file translates XML to HTML to improve readability of dumped XML Table 15 File Locations Directory File Files and Directories 163 Description user MAC defaults dtd This DTD file specifies the structure of the XML file that contains default values used by the user MAC command script user MAC defaults xml user MAC defaults xsl This XML file contains default values used by the user MAC command script This XSL file translates XML to HTML to improve readability of the default XML opt 3com components vcxdata version bin log Contains various log files The log files generated by execution of the user MAC command include user MAC and a timestamp in the filename for example user MAC Thu May 4 08 45 20 2006 10g 164 CHAPTER 10 MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 To V7 1 This appendix describes the procedures required to upgrade a system running VCX server software version 7 0 to VCX server software version 7 1 This appendix includes the following topics m Verifying Software Versions m Overview of a 7 0 to 7 1 Upgrade wm Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers m Upgrading a Single Site System With Four
120. allows you to change it 3Com VCX Multi Master Replication DROP continue with User Inputs 106 CHAPTER 7 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued VCXDATATESTONEX Database Multi Master Replication DROP Process starting For Log Details Refer to log replication VCXDATATESTONEX DROP200503300731 10g Dec 14 2005 9 05 25 AM com coms replication run Start dropReplication INFO 3Com VCXDATATESTONEX Database Multi Master Replication DROP KKK RR RK RK KKK k k k ck KKK KK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ok kk k kk kk COMPLETE ox ke kkk e e e n x kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Dropping replication succeeded When you see this message the database replication that was previously active has been deactivated dropped The script now presents the network parameters and allows you to change them This wizard reconfigures networking and related services The current values of networking parameters will be displayed and you will be able to make any changes necessary dai dE Configuring Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP VCX servers can use DHCP for automated configuration but this requires that the DHCP server is configured to provide the proper options Unless you know that your environment is set up in this way you should say no here and configure static network parameters Use DHCP on eth0 to configure network parameters no Sample VCX Server Reconfiguratio
121. amp Miquelon Puerto Rico Paraguay Suriname El Salvador Turks amp Caicos Is Trinidad amp Tobago United States Uruguay St Vincent Venezuela Virgin Islands UK Virgin Islands US Sample VCX Server Reconfiguration 109 Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued In this sample script the country code remains unchanged Please select a time zone from the following list I Iy TO II 12 I3 14 I5 16 IT 18 19 20 21 22 aN HU FWD Alaska T Alaska T Alaska T Alaska T Aleutian Central Central Central Eastern Eastern Eastern Eastern Eastern Eastern Eastern Eastern Hawaii Mountain Mountain Mountain Mountain Pacific Enter zone 1 Selected Time Zone ime Alaska panhandle ime Alaska panhandle neck ime ime west Alaska Islands Time Time Michigan Wisconsin border Time North Dakota Oliver County Indiana Crawford County Indiana Starke County Indiana Switzerland County Indiana most locations Standard Time Standard Time Standard Time Standard Time Time Time Kentucky Louisville area Time Kentucky Wayne County Time Michigan most locations Standard Time Time Time Navajo Arizona Time south Idaho amp east Oregon Time 3 In this sample script the time zone remains unchanged America New_York The script displays a summary of the configuration information that you have accepted or c
122. annot upgrade or downgrade one component in a VCX system and not upgrade or downgrade the other system components If you add a server to an existing VCX system for example a branch office the VCX components on the new server must be installed with the same version of the VCX software as the existing components Downgrading from 7 1 to 7 0 Important Considerations Follow the procedures in this section to downgrade your VCX system from version 7 1 to 7 0 Before performing a downgrade keep these considerations in mind Downgrades are typically performed for one of the following reasons a You have successfully upgraded your VCX system but want to revert to the previous version of VCX system software a During a VCX system upgrade one component fails to upgrade and want to revert to the previous version of VCX system software If a component fails to upgrade contact your 3Com Support for assistance before proceeding To use the downgrade procedures in this section your VCX system must have previously been successfully running version 7 1 The downgrade procedure does not back port any configuration or database modifications you might have made while running version 7 1 Following this procedure restores the VCX system to the operational state it was in prior to the upgrade occurring If an upgrade at a regional office is unsuccessful contact your 3Com Support for assistance and downgrade the regional office servers Do
123. ary servers hosting Tomcat using the tomcat account Depending on your VCX configuration Tomcat runs on either the IP Telephony server the IP Telephony and IP Messaging server or the Call server Enter the following commands on each server to change the directory and stop Tomcat cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Log in to both the primary and secondary Authentication and Directory servers as user Cworks Depending on your VCX configuration the Authentication and Directory service runs on either the IP Telephony server the IP Telephony and IP Messaging server or the Authentication and Directory standalone server Enter the following commands on each server to change the directory and stop the VCX Authentication and Directory service cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Enter the following command on both the primary and secondary Authentication and Directory servers cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin Enter the following command on the primary VCX Authentication and Directory server to drop replication dropReplication Enter the following command on both the primary and secondary servers to restore the VCX Authentication and Directory server database restoreVcxdata The utility prompts you to verify that Tomcat and the VCX Authentication and Directory server services are stopped Enter y to confirm the services are stopped The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id prom
124. as no secondary server To downgrade a Call Records server perform these steps To switch the VCX version log in as root and enter this command vex switchversion manual 7 x Example vex switchversion manual 7 1 0c The vex switchversion command m Stops VCX services m Changes a link to point to the requested VCX version m Issues a warning that databases must be restored CAUTION Do not reboot the system or restart VCX services until databases have been restored The VCX 7 1 x version has been selected but the databases still contain 7 1 y versioned data This combination will not operate successfully Update the pointer to the configuration file using this command SetConfigFile opt 3com VCX conf VCXConfiguration xml If necessary switch to the previous version of the operating system The upgrade from 7 1 x to 7 1 y may or may not have required the installation of a new VCX operating system version This step describes how to determine if a new operating system version was installed and if so how to revert to the previous version The examples in this step use the assumption that upgrading from version 7 1 x to 7 1 y changed the operating system version from 4 2 0 to 4 2 1 a Login as root b To determine which operating system versions are available enter this command vex os query The output from this command appears Example OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 0 dev hda2 A B 4 2 1 dev hda3 B ac
125. at VCX software has been successfully installed your network is functioning normally and that you understand your VCX system configuration single site or multi site VCX system communication is based on the Session Initiation Protocol SIP SIP is used to set up maintain and terminate connections calls between end points These end points are SIP enabled devices such as telephones call processors and gateways Basically VCX configuration consists of identifying and configuring the end points in your VCX network and setting up the rules that govern communication between the end points In general VCX maintenance includes the tasks shown in Table 4 In a multi site configuration some of these tasks must be performed at each site regions and branches 22 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW Table 4 VCX Maintenance Tasks Task Purpose Reference Configure accounting groups on Identifies the Accounting services from Chapter 2 the Call Records service which the Call Records service should collect Call Detail Records CDRs Maintain VCX system servers Tasks include Chapter 3 m Clearing the Tomcat cache a Modifying a time zone configuration w Stopping and starting various VCX services wm Backing up and restoring Authentication and Directory server databases m Managing SNMP station access a Changing a Codec Back up and restore VCX Back up all relevant VCX component and Chapter 4 com
126. at message archival was not originally enabled on this server 118 CHAPTER 7 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued IP Messaging includes an optional ability to back up messages to an external server Enable data backup server for IPMS N Press the Enter or Return key to accept the default answer In this sample script the default answer N indicates that data backup was not originally enabled on this server IP Messaging includes an optional ability to import subscriber profiles from VCX Enable VCX subscriber bulk import Y Press the Enter or Return key to accept the default answer In this sample script the default answer Y indicates that bulk import was originally enabled on this server For VCX subscriber bulk import the user name to use when accessing the VCX Authentication amp Directory Server is needed User name for access to Auth amp Dir Server cworks In addition the password for the previously provided user name is required Specify the password to use when accessing the VCX Authentication amp Directory Server Password for access to Auth amp Dir Server cworks This cworks password is used for authentication when accessing the Authentication and Directory server database This password must be the same as the cworks database authentication password on the Authentication and Directory server It is not necessarily the same as the password used to log in to t
127. back up one component or a subset of components on a single machine Backup files are not encrypted Backup files typically contain sensitive information and must be treated with care and stored securely Files that do not contain configuration data for example log files and cache files are not backed up Configuration files associated with the VCX operating system that are not typically modified in the course of normal system configuration are not backed up Backing Up a VCX Configuration This section describes how to use the vex config backup command to create a VCX configuration backup file To create a VCX configuration backup file Log in using the root account to the machine hosting the VCX configuration you want to back up Enter the following command vex config backup optional arguments The optional arguments include help Displays information on command usage a fullauto Specifies that the command should run in automatic mode In this mode command execution does not provide any interactive prompts or queries About the Backup File Backing Up a VCX Configuration 73 a test lists the files that would be backed up but does not create the backup file The backup file is created in the opt 3com VCX backup directory The directory will be created if it does not already exist Note that a VCX component may designate some configuration files and directories as optional Optional
128. base replication On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop S70tomcat stop On the Master Site the secondary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication When the script prompts you enter the site ID of the Master Site Verify Database Replication Wait at least 20 minutes to allow time for database replication to be completed Enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin checkReplication The message that appears should contain the word NORMAL If it does not wait for a few more minutes and then repeat the command Do not proceed beyond this point until you see the NORMAL message Switch Operating System version The upgrade from 7 1 x to 7 1 y may or may not have required the installation of a new version of the VCX operating system This procedure describes how to determine if a new operating system version was installed and if so how to revert to the previous version This operation must be performed on all VCX servers DA Downgrading a Multiple Site System 7 1 y to 7 1 x AN Downgrading from 7 1 y to 7 1 x 309 The examples in this procedure use the assumption that upgrading from version 7 1 x
129. before enabling global voicemail integration on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers wm Upgrade the replicated Authentication and Directory servers in each regional office m Upgrade the IP Messaging servers in each regional office m Upgrade the Call servers in each regional office a Upgrade the Call Records server optional m Upgrade the branch offices hosted by a region This section describes how to upgrade the Authentication and Directory servers in Region 1 and Region 2 In this example of two region replication replication is dropped on the Authentication and Directory server in each region As the number of regions increases so does the complexity of replication The upgrade process for Authentication and Directory servers in a multi region system Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 193 depends on how the servers have been installed and how replication has been set up To upgrade the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 Log in as root to the Call server in Region 1 Stop the Tomcat process by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Log in as root to the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 Ensure that database replication has no errors see Preliminary Steps and then drop replication by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication The drop replication script start
130. ce This chapter describes how to set up this system m IP Messaging CDRs are generated and collected by the IP Messaging system Refer to the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for information Depending on your VCX system configuration an Accounting service can run on any of these servers m P Telephony and Messaging Server m IP Telephony Server m Call Server The Accounting service collects CDRs for the server on which it runs which then provides the CDRs to the Call Records service The Call Records service can run on any of these servers m P Telephony and Messaging Server m P Telephony Server m Call Records Server a standalone server usually located in a regional office A VCX system requires only one Call Records service to manage all the Accounting services The Call Records service collects CDRs from one or more Accounting services and creates a Super CDR A Super CDR consists of one or more individual CDRs that have been merged into a single XML file The Call Records service organizes Accounting services into groups Each group can contain one or more Accounting services but an Accounting service can belong to only one group Configuring an Accounting Service Group 29 For example your VCX system could include the following components m The East region includes two sites call processors each running an Accounting service SalesE and EngE m The West region includes two site
131. ce N A starts For internal use only 38 CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING THE CALL RECORDS SERVICE Table 7 CDR Field Descriptions and Values continued Tag Variable Description and Values Example bO SESSIONSEQUENCEEND Indicates when a session sequence ends For internal use only N A b1 ACCTAUTHENTICATIONFAILURECNT Account Auth Failure Count 1 b3 CALLINGPARTYE164ADDRESS An E 164 number from which the call is placed to the access gateway Only the phone extension is displayed 304001 b6 CALLINGPARTYIPADDRESS Calling Party IP Address 9843771d b9 CALLEDPARTYE164ADDRESS An E 164 number of the called destination Only the phone extension is displayed 333333 c2 CALLEDPARTYIPADDRESS Called Party Phone Number 12794398 d8 INGRESSGATEKEEPERIPADDRESS Call Processor IP Address 10 10 10 10 e4 CALLIDENTIFIER This is a globally unique call ID For internal use only N A e5 CALLTYPE Indicates the type of call placed 1 Phone to phone 2 PC to phone 3 Phone to PC 4 Fax to fax e6 CALLSTARTTIMEINGRESSGWACCESS Date and time when the call accessed the ingress gateway 20050414 19 54 07 e8 CALLSTARTTIMEANSWERED Date and time when the call is answered For example receipt of answer supervision until cal disconnect 20050407 20 37 31 fO CALLENDTIME Date and time when the
132. cifies the name of the XML file uname or u Yes Single String Mandatory The value specifies the username associated with the account The specified name must be unique This value is also required to change account attributes or to delete the account new uname Yes Single String Used with the mod parameter to change a username to the specified value new phone Yes Single String Used with the mod parameter to change a user s phone extension to the specified value Table 14 user MAC Command Parameters continued Using Single User Mode 153 Parameter Takes Parameter full name abbreviation Value Mode Type Description password or pa Yes Single String The value specifies the password the user enters to access the VCX User Provisioning interface To create the account with the default password changeme omit this field title or t Yes Single String The value specifies an honorific for example Mr or Ms first Yes Single String The value specifies the user s first name middle or mi Yes Single String The value specifies the user s middle name last or l Yes Single String The value specifies the user s last name email or e Yes Single String The value specifies the user s e mail address street1 Yes Single String The value specifies the user s street address street2 Yes Single String The value specifies the second part of the
133. ck Reference Guide m VCX Security Guide The following documents are a part of the IP Messaging Module wm P Messaging Module Quick Reference Guide 3Com Native Interface wm P Messaging Module User Guide 3Com Native Interface wm P Messaging Module Quick Reference Guide Traditional Interface a P Messaging Module User Guide Traditional Interface wm P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide a E Mail Reader Application Quick Start Guide The following documents are a part of the IP Conferencing Module wm P Conferencing Module Installation Guide a P Conferencing Module Administration Guide a P Conferencing Module User Guide m Convergence Center Client User and Administration Guide 14 ABOUT THIS GUIDE The following documents provide information on products that support this release Enterprise Management Suite m Enterprise Management Suite Getting Started Guide Version 2 3 m Enterprise Management Suite User Guide Version 2 3 m Enterprise Management Suite 2 3 for VCX 7 1 User Guide Digital Gateways m V7122and V6100 Digital User Guide Version 4 8 m V6100 Digital Fast Track Installation Guide Version 4 8 m V7122 Digital Fast Track Installation Guide Version 4 8 Analog Gateways m V7111 Analog Fast Track Installation Guide Version 4 8 m V7111 Analog User Guide Version 4 8 a V6000 Analog Fast Track Installation Guide Version 4 8 m V6000 Analog User Guide Version 4 8 Comments p Send
134. ckup database content as well as VCX configuration data See Chapter 5 for information on backing up the provisioning data stored in the VCX Authentication and Directory server database a See the P Messaging Operations and System Administration Guide for information on backing up voicemail and other IP Messaging data When restoring a system restore the VCX configuration backup first then restore the database and IP Messaging backups You cannot back up configuration data from one version of VCX and restore that data to a different version of VCX That is you cannot back up a VCX configuration upgrade VCX software and then try to 72 CHAPTER 4 BACKING UP AND RESTORING A VCX CONFIGURATION apply the old configuration by restoring the backup file to the upgraded system You can backup and restore the currently active version of VCX software and the currently active version of the VCX operating system only Configuration files from any other versions of VCX or its constituent components or the operating system which may be on the system are not backed up This means that depending on the reason for the backup and restore you may not be able to downgrade a restored system to a prior release You cannot modify a configuration backup file and restore it either as a way of changing a configuration or as a way of configuring multiple systems with similar configurations Partial backups are not supported for example you cannot
135. complete view of all of the system configurable parameters and allows you to configure those parameters in real time The configuration are automatically written to the configuration file nmdb xml to maintain the configuration between application restarts The Remote CLI application retains 50 commands in its history which can be displayed using either the up or down arrows of the keyboard The Remote CLI application is not case sensitive and commands can be truncated as long as they are still uniquely identified otherwise it will use the first variable listed alphabetically For example the following shows two ways to enter the config command gt config CcTrusted RowStatus 4 Index 1 TrustedAddress lt IP address gt or CLI Command Descriptions 337 gt conf cct row 4 index 1 trustedaddr lt IP address gt You can enter the help command at the remote CLI application prompt help to display a list of application commands You can enter a command without a parameter to display a list of available parameters for example show AcctCfg AcctLogFilters AcctServer AcctServerStats AcctServiceStats AdhocServer AppCmd AppId AppMibs AuthCfg AuthLogFilters AuthServer AuthServerStats AuthServiceStats CcCfg CcLogFilters CcQosCfg CcQosMonitoredEndpoints CcStats CcTrusted LogCfg SipCfg SipLogFilters CLI Command The remote CLI application uses the following commands for Descriptions administering the Cal
136. configured Stopping VCX CommonAgent OK Starting VCX CommonAgent OK Stopping VCX Firewall OK Starting VCX Firewall OK Reconfiguration of components is complete VCX services are currently Stopped and replication has been dropped After all systems are reconfigured you must restore replication Then restart VCX services or reboot the system Reconfiguration Completed End of Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script MANAGING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES This chapter describes how to manage one or more Uninterruptible Power Supplies UPS in your VCX system It describes how to add UPS support to an existing VCX system and how to monitor UPS status This chapter includes the following topics m UPS Overview m Adding UPS Support to an Existing VCX System m Monitoring UPS Status m VCX Server Response to Power Events 124 CHAPTER 8 MANAGING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES UPS Overview Critical network equipment is often connected to an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS to ensure continued operation in the event of mains power loss A server in a VCX system can be connected to and can monitor one or two if the server has dual power supplies UPS devices Each UPS includes a battery The battery maintains a charge while power is supplied to the VCX system When power fails the UPS battery takes over until its capacity is nearly exhausted At this point
137. ctory services on both the primary and secondary servers a Enter the following commands to change the directory and start Tomcat cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat start b To start the VCX Authentication and Directory server enter the following commands Exporting Table Data 85 cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start Exporting Table Data Exporting Table Data for a Single Table p Exporting Table Data for all Tables gt Use the CWDATA package to export tables into flat files Export data as follows a For one table in a schema except the runtime tables See Exporting Table Data for a Single Table m Forall the tables under one schema except the runtime tables See Exporting Table Data for all Tables Exporting data saves the current configuration Data for a single table can be exported to the export directory listed in the Oracle initialization folder Runtime tables cannot be exported To export data for a single table From a SQL Plus command line login as schema Execute the following For this procedure change the following to match the system m Change the value of p dir to the export directory a Change the p tabname to the name of the table being exported m Make sure to enter the procedure name EXACTLY as shown SET SERVEROUTPUT ON declare p dir varchar2 255 p tabname varchar2 255 begin p dir tmp export p tabname table name cwda
138. d the branch office server Downgrading from 7 1 y to 7 1 x 315 Establish Database Replication On Master Definition Site establish database replication On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop S70tomcat stop On the Master Site the secondary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication When the script prompts you enter the site ID of the Master Site Verify Database Replication Wait at least 20 minutes to allow time for database replication to be completed Enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin checkReplication The message that appears should contain the word NORMAL If it does not wait for a few more minutes and then repeat the command Do not proceed beyond this point until you see the NORMAL message Switch Operating System version The upgrade from 7 1 x to 7 1 y may or may not have required the installation of a new version of the VCX operating system This procedure describes how to determine if a new operating system version was installed and if so how to revert to the previous version 316 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE p WP WE The examples in this procedure use t
139. d changing parameters for each VCX service at a detailed level This is not needed in most cases and is recommended only for advanced users Do you wish to review service parameters in detail N Press the Enter or Return key to accept the default answer N If you answer Y to this question the script enters a mode in which you can review and modify low level configuration parameters for each service This is not needed for standard configurations and using it successfully requires substantial VCX configuration expertise 3Com does not support this mode of making configuration changes Please wait while the wizard completes 122 CHAPTER 7 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued Applying Changes The script displays several status messages The last message reminds you to reboot all servers after they have all been reconfigured and to reboot them all at the same time Configuring VCX components Configuring system OK Configuring vcox firewall firstboot OK Configuring upsmon OK Configuring commagent OK Configuring voxdata OK Configuring acctxml OK Configuring bssxml OK Configuring ums sh OK Configuring tomcat OK Configuring vcxcentral OK Configuring vexprov OK Configuring callp OK Configuring adhoc OK Configuring devdnldsvr OK Configured VCX components 12
140. d to upgrade to 7 0 Upgrade your VCX system from version 6 0 to 7 0 These procedures upgrade the VCX system to an operational state and assume that the VCX system is successfully operating at version 6 0 before you perform the upgrade This appendix describes how to upgrade a VCX server by entering commands at a locally attached console You can also upgrade a VCX server remotely by using 3Com Corporation s Enterprise Management Suite EMS EMS is an SNMP based client server application Refer to the Overview of a 6 0 to 7 0 Upgrade 253 Enterprise Management Suite User Guide for VCX V7000 Components for information All components in a VCX system must run the same version of VCX software This requirement has the following implications m You cannot upgrade or downgrade one component in a VCX system and not upgrade or downgrade the other system components m f you add a server to an existing VCX system for example a branch office the VCX components on the new server must be installed with the same version of the VCX software as the existing components CAUTION 3Com Corporation strongly recommends that you perform backups of your VCX system on a regular basis for example weekly These backups should include provisioning database and voicemail database content m See Chapter 5 for information on backing up the provisioning data stored in the VCX Authentication and Directory server database m See the IP Messaging Module Opera
141. de procedure you need to perform depends on your VCX system configuration see VCX Software Components and VCX Hardware Configurations You can use the vex showconfigtype command to verify the configuration type Your configuration determines the correct tar file or files required for the upgrade m You must stop database replication before starting the upgrade process On replicated systems check replication status to make sure it is normal To check replication status execute the following steps on the server hosting the Authentication and Directory services database Log in using the cworks account Enter ed opt 3com VCX vexdata bin Enter checkReplication The returned status should be NORMAL If replication errors need to be cleared Enter deleteReplicationErrors CAUTION Do not attempt an upgrade if there are replication errors that cannot be deleted CAUTION If you are upgrading a multi site VCX system you must ensure that phone extensions are unique throughout the system In a VCX v7 0 multi site system it was possible to configure duplicate extensions in different regions This included not only extensions assigned to a user but extensions assigned to hunt group page groups and call pickup groups A VCX v7 1 multi site system uses the Global Directory which combines the local user directories on each region to enable call routing between regions See the VCX Administration Guide version 7 1 for informati
142. do not have redundant power supplies and the primary and secondary servers of any configuration type are co located then you should assign the primary and secondary servers of a given configuration type to different UPS devices see Figure 4 For example if you have a regional VCX system that has a primary IP Messaging Server and a secondary IP Messaging Server plus other VCX servers and you are using two UPS devices to power all the servers put the primary IP Messaging Server on one UPS and the secondary IP Messaging Server on the other UPS This reduces the possibility of a single failure disrupting IP Messaging service availability 132 CHAPTER 8 MANAGING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES Figure 4 Two UPS Devices Powering Redundant VCX Servers Primary IPM Server VCX Server Y UPS UPS VCX Server Secondary IPM Server When you have multiple UPS devices you should connect each UPS to different mains circuits if possible Dual UPS System Configuring the Master VCX Server To enable and configure a VCX server as the master in a multiple UPS system 1 Log in using the root account to the VCX server you want to designate as the master 2 Enter the following command vex ups setup configuration parameters You must concatenate the following vex ups setup command configuration parameters responses are shown in bold master Y Enter Y you must uppe
143. e To upgrade the branch offices in Region 1 local messaging Log in to the first branch office server as root Obtain a copy of the vex a11 7 1 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the branch office server The variable x indicates the version of VCX software for example 208 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 vex all 7 1 3c tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number 3 To start the upgrade process enter the following commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx all 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are SreSasce she eeowas Ss Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available 4 Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable Adhoc Conferencing UPS Monitoring and Global Voicemail Integration 5 The Adhoc Conferencing prompt appears In order to support ad hoc conferences with more than 3 participants the Adhoc Confer
144. e IP Messaging servers wm Upgrade the replicated Authentication and Directory servers in each regional office a Upgrade the IP Messaging servers in each regional office m Upgrade the Call servers in each regional office a Upgrade the Call Records server optional m Upgrade the branch offices hosted by a region This section describes how to upgrade the Authentication and Directory servers in Region 1 and Region 2 In this example of two region replication replication is only dropped for one master site As the number of regions increases so does the complexity of replication The upgrade process for Authentication and Directory servers in a multi region system depends on the servers have been installed 236 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y To upgrade the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 Log in as root to the Call server in Region 1 Stop the Tomcat process by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Log in as root to the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 4 Ensure that database replication has no errors see Preliminary Steps and then drop replication by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication The drop replication script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter the site ID configured for Re
145. e VCX Authentication and Directory Server Database 80 Restoring the VCX Authentication and Directory Server Database 81 Exporting Table Data 85 Exporting Table Data for a Single Table 85 Exporting Table Data for all Tables 85 Importing Saved Table Data 86 Clearing the Configurable Tables 87 MANUALLY CONFIGURING MULTI MASTER REPLICATION Multi Master Replication Overview 90 Replicated Table Location 90 Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Telephony and Messaging Server 91 Manually Configuring Region to Region Replication 93 Verifying Replication at a Branch Office 96 Verifying the Number of VCX Data Schemas in a Region 97 Deleting Replication Errors 99 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Reconfiguration Overview 102 Sample VCX Server Reconfiguration 103 MANAGING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES UPS Overview 124 UPS Configuration Options 125 Adding UPS Support to an Existing VCX System 125 UPS Setup Options 125 Requirements 127 Adding Single UPS Device Support 127 Adding Multiple UPS Support 130 Disabling UPS Monitoring on a VCX Server 135 Monitoring UPS Status 136 VCX Server Response to Power Events 138 CONFIGURING THE CALL PROCESSOR Call Processor Overview 142 Call Processor Advantages 142 Configuration Methods 142 Configuring Trusted Endpoints 143 Adding Trusted Endpoints 143 Editing Trusted Endpoints 145 Deleting Trusted Endpoints 145 Configuring Accounting and Directory
146. e codec data convert utility before running the change codec utility When you convert custom prompts and voice mail messages to a different codec you should run the codec data convert utility on both the primary IP Messaging server and the secondary IP Messaging server The following example assumes the IP Messaging system is operating with the default codec G 711u and the default set of language prompts Changing Codecs 67 US English The steps in the example install the G 729a codec and convert any existing custom prompts and voice mail messages to the G 729a codec format IP Messaging must not be actively processing calls while the codec data convert utility is running Log in to the primary IP Messaging server using the root account Enter the following command to switch to the IP Messaging installation directory cd opt installtemp Enter the following command to install the G 729a codec vex install UMS UK EN G729a SPEAK 1 1 1386 rpm Enter the following command to switch to the directory containing the codec data convert utility cd usr app app dir Enter the following command to run the codec data convert utility codec data convert g711u g729a If the utility runs successfully it returns a list of converted files and the total number of files processed If the utility fails to run successfully it returns an error message and stops further processing Log in to the secondary IP Messaging server and repeat ste
147. e following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S80callp start Stopping the Call Processor Restarting the Call Processor Managing the Call Processor Service 55 You can stop the Call Processor service using operating system commands or by using EMS Using Operating System Commands To stop the Call Processor service using operating system commands Log in into the server hosting the Call Processor service using the vcx account Enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S80callp stop Using EMS To stop the Call Processor service from EMS From the Explorer tab right click the 3Com Call Processor service From the pop up menu select Maintenance then select Hard Shutdown A dialog box appears and displays the progress of the command When the command has been completed the Working icon changes to a Finished icon You can restart the Call Processor service using operating system commands or using EMS Restarting the Call Processor service stops and restarts the Call Processor service but leaves the Call Processor monitor running Using Operating System Commands To restart the Call Processor service using operating system commands Log in into the server hosting the Call Processor service using the vcx account Enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S80callp restart 56 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS Using EMS To restart the Call Processor service from EMS From the E
148. e main menu Once a group is deleted all Accounting services that are configured to be in that group are no longer associated with anything Deleted groups will no longer collect CDRs from the Accounting services The CDRs are stored on the servers hosting the Accounting services and will continue to be stored on the servers as long as there is enough disk space To delete a group Log on to the VCX server hosting the Call Records service as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX bssxml bin config sh 32 CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING THE CALL RECORDS SERVICE A menu of configuration options appears followed by the SELECT OPERATION prompt At the prompt enter 103 The Enter the Group Name to Delete prompt appears The configured groups are listed above the prompt Enter the name of the group you want to delete The group is deleted To verify the group is deleted use the list option 104 Adding Accounting Services to the Call Records Service p Accounting services are not automatically associated with a Call Records service To have the Call Records service collect CDRs from individual Accounting services to create a Super CDR you first need to assign the Accounting services to one or more groups see Adding an Accounting Group then assign the group to the Call Records service If you have a multiple site configuration includes more than one server be sure to add all Accounting services to the Ca
149. e upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary IP Telephony server and on the secondary IP Telephony server The variable y indicates the version of VCX software for example vex all 7 0 3c tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number Upgrading the Primary IP Telephony Server Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 227 7 Obtain a copy of the vex ipmsg 7 1 yc tar software upgrade file and 1 place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary IP Messaging server and on the secondary IP Messaging server Next execute the following steps in the order listed a Upgrade the primary IP Telephony server See Upgrading the Primary IP Telephony Server a Upgrade the primary IP Messaging server See Upgrading the Primary IP Messaging Server m Upgrade the secondary IP Telephony server See Upgrading the Secondary IP Telephony Server a Upgrade the primary IP Messaging server See Upgrading the Secondary IP Messaging Server m Set up database replication on the primary IP Telephony server See Set Up Database Replication Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the primary IP Telephony server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the primary IP Telephony server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcox softswitch 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to co
150. econdary VCX Server m Setup database replication on the primary VCX server See Set Up Database Replication Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the primary VCX server 1 To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the primary VCX Server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx all 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are SSse Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available 2 Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File 3 Install the license key See Installing a License Key File Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vcx switchversion 7 0 xc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output Upgrading the Secondary VCX Server Upgrading a Single Site System With Two S
151. ed sufficient time to complete their individual shutdown operations Each VCX server attempts to confirm receipt of the shutdown command from the UPS If the shutdown command is not received a VCX server tries to resend the signal 3 times before proceeding to complete the shutdown If signalling fails for example because of network connectivity issues during the shutdown sequence the VCX server tries to send a trap The server receives power but in a halted state until the UPS battery is exhausted and the UPS turns itself off Power Restoration When power returns each VCX server wm Boots and begins to provide service m Generates a trap indicating system startup Power Restoration During Shutdown If power is restored after a VCX server as begun final shutdown sequence but before the shutdown has completed the server completes the shutdown and signals the UPS to turn off The UPS turns off then back on automatically and the server restarts Unable to Contact UPS If a VCX server is configured for UPS monitoring but is unable to contact a configured UPS a trap is generated to indicate that UPS monitoring is not occurring The server continues to operate normally and periodically retries to contact the UPS If the UPS subsequently becomes reachable a trap is generated indicating that the error condition has been cleared 140 CHAPTER 8 MANAGING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES CONFIGURING THE CALL PROCESSOR
152. egional office m Global messaging Messaging services are provided to users locally by the either a regional office or a branch office For local and global messaging you need to perform the steps in this section on a console attached to each IP Messaging server in all regions Region 1 and Region 2 in this example For Global Voicemail Integration the Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS must be installed and then configured through the IP Messaging administrator configuration interface before enabling global voicemail integration on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers Refer to the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for more information and for configuration options This section assumes that a pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers are available IP Messaging servers are typically configured in pairs with one server acting as the primary and the other acting as the secondary The primary IP Messaging server and a secondary IP Messaging server may be located in the same region or in different regions To upgrade IP Messaging servers running version 7 0 software Stop the primary IP Messaging server and a secondary IP Messaging server by entering the following commands as root on each server cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop Obtain a copy of the vex ipmsg 7 1 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary IP Messaging server
153. em participates in Global Voicemail Is Global Voicemail enabled N a If you have installed and configured through the IP Messaging administrator configuration interface a pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS to enable global voicemail integration you can answer y to this prompt and go to step b If not enter n and go to step 8 b The upgrade script asks if this server as a Global Voicemail Central Server In a Global Voicemail system one site s IPMSG servers are designated as the Central Servers and coordinate the feature s operation Typically the Central Servers are at one of the regional sites Is this a Central Server for Global Voicemail N If this server has been configured as a Global Voicemail Central Server enter y and go to step 8 If you answer n to indicate that this is not a Central Server you will be prompted to enter the Central Server IP address After completing the Adhoc Conferencing UPS Monitoring and Global Voicemail Integration prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few 210 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 m
154. ence Service is used This service should be enabled on this server unless another Server dedicated to Adhoc Conferencing will be used instead If available a separate server typically provides greater capacity and may be shared among sites Use the Adhoc service on this server Y N Y If you want this server to act as a multi caller up to 6 callers conferencing server enter y If not enter n 6 The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 209 If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts The Global Voicemail Integration prompt appears When multiple IP Messaging systems are in use for example at a region and one or more branches the Global Voicemail capability allows these systems to act as a single unified voicemail system Say yes here if this syst
155. end server database before bulk loading copy the exported files to the opt 3com VCX lt schema gt db lt schema gt bulkload directory and then load the data into the database m To add the exported data to an existing database that already has data loaded copy the exported files to the opt 3com VCX lt schema gt db lt schema gt bulkload directory and then load the data into the database one table at a time Clearing the Configurable Tables p Exporting Table Data 87 Use this procedure to clear all the data tables in either the Accounting service or the Authentication and Directory server Once data is deleted it must be reloaded from the text files To clear the configurable tables from the back end server database Log on to the directory server as cworks Change to the opt 3com VCX schema bin directory cd opt 3com VCX lt schema gt bin Clear the data by entering the following command besbulkload pl s TNSname n schema p schema password clear 88 CHAPTER 5 MANAGING AUTHENTICATION AND DIRECTORY SERVICE DATABASES MANUALLY CONFIGURING MULTI MASTER REPLICATION This chapter describes Multi Master Replication MMR and how to manually configure it in your VCX system This chapter includes the following topics Multi Master Replication Overview Replicated Table Location Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Telephony and Messaging Server Manually Configu
156. ends regular database backups You should also back up this database before performing any upgrades If the upgrade fails and you must downgrade use the restore utility to repopulate the database You cannot back up an older version of the IP Telephony Server and restore it to a newer version It must be the same version VCX systems whether single site or multi site typically include redundant pairs of servers The steps in this section describe how to backup the database on one VCX Authentication and Directory server Depending on the reason for the backup this server may be the primary or secondary server For example if you are performing a routine database backup you would execute the steps on the machine hosting the primary Authentication and Directory server However if the primary Authentication and Directory server database is corrupt you would execute the steps on the machine hosting the secondary Authentication and Directory server so you could restore the database on the primary To run the VCX Authentication and Directory server database backup utility Log in to the server hosting Tomcat using the tomcat account Depending on your VCX configuration Tomcat runs on either the IP Telephony server the IP Telephony and IP Messaging server or the Call server Enter the following commands to change the directory and stop Tomcat cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Log in to the server hosting the Authe
157. ephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start Start the Tomcat process on the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server by entering the following command S70tomcat start Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices Upgrading the Call Records Server Some VCX multi site systems have regional offices but no branch offices Each regional office contains a primary VCX server and a secondary VCX server These servers perform call processing and IP Messaging tasks One of the regional offices also contains a Call Records server which gathers call records from each of the regional offices m To upgrade the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server follow the instructions in Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers earlier in this appendix wm To upgrade the Call Records server see the following section Upgrading the Call Records Server To upgrade the Call Records server Log in to the Call Records server as root Stop all VCX processes on the Call Records server by entering the following command cd etc init d vex stop Obtain a copy of the vex bss 7 1 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Call Records server Enter these commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx bss 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade
158. eplication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete g You can check replication status by entering the following command checkReplication 3 When the replication is complete and status is reported as NORMAL enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Start the Authentication and Directory service on the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start Start the Tomcat process on the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server by entering the following command S70tomcat start Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers Single site VCX systems can have either two servers or four servers m Ina two server configuration each server runs IP Telephony server software and IP Messaging server software wm Ina four server configuration one pair of servers runs IP Telephony server software the second pair of servers runs IP Messaging server software Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 179 Follow the procedures in this section to upgrade the four server configuration at a single site from VCX version 7 0 software to VCX version 7 1 software Before you begin the upgrade procedures on the four servers perform these steps Log in as root on the primary IP Telephony server and on the secondary IP Telephony server Stop the Tomcat process first o
159. er Definition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of ethO on the primary VCX server d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address of ethO on the secondary VCX server e The Do you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes During script execution messages appear describing the replication setup Messages also appear stating that firewall setup should allow communication between the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server These messages are a reminder firewall setup was performed during VCX software installation f TheHave you executed the ABOVE mentioned VCX FIREWALL steps y n prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes When the replication is complete Multi Master Replication Status is reported as NORMAL Do not continue to the next step until the replication is complete Note that replication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete g You can check the replication by entering the following command checkReplication 3 When the replication is complete and status is reported as NORMAL enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 225 Start the Authentication and Directory service on t
160. er is configured as the master listslaves Lists the IP addresses of all VCX servers configured as slaves all Displays values for the following parameters m Upsstatus m upsload m upsmfr m batterycharge m Upsserial upsmodel help Displays information on command usage The following examples of the vex ups status command were entered on the master VCX server that is monitoring a single UPS The first command example uses the a11 parameter vex ups status upsO all upsstatus online upsload 203340 upsmfr APC batterycharge 100 0 upsserial ES0552000488 upsmodel Smart UPS 750 The following commands return output not provided by the a11 parameter vex ups status upsO0 isconfig isconfig UY vex ups status ups0 ismaster ismaster Uy vcex ups status ups0 listslaves 10 230 188 7 138 CHAPTER 8 MANAGING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES VCX Server Response to Power Events This section describes how UPS supported VCX systems respond to various power events Power events and VCX server responses are shown in Table 11 Table 11 VCX Server Behavior for Power Events Event Response Power Loss When one or more VCX servers are connected to a UPS and a power loss occurs the servers continue to operate without interruption The servers do not initiate a shutdown unless the UPS battery power level is below the threshold capacity for shutdown for example because the UPS batter
161. erate In the next series of questions you will be asked for information about these and for other global parameters The site name provides a user friendly description of a location in a multi site VCX installation This may be used to identify a site in certain management interfaces The site name may be up to 255 characters long and can contain letters numbers spaces underscores dashes and colons Enter a description for this site Site Three Enter the new site description for this server The Customer Name identifies the company using this VCX system Enter the customer name 3Com Customer Some VCX applications can use European date ordering Answer Y here to enable this Use European date order Y N N In order to support ad hoc conferences with more than 3 participants the Adhoc Conference Service is used This service should be enabled on this Server unless another server dedicated to Adhoc Conferencing will be used instead If available a separate server typically provides greater capacity and may be shared among sites Use the Adhoc service on this server Y N Y y Press the Enter or Return key to accept the default answer In this sample script the default answer Y indicates that the Adhoc Conference Service was previously configured on this server 112 CHAPTER 7 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued The SIP default dialing domain is used to constr
162. erface Note The UPS must already be configured with this address UPS IP address 10 230 67 50 116 CHAPTER 7 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued The SNMP write community string configured in the UPS is required For Security reasons it is recommended that the default value provided by the UPS be changed UPS write community string private The string you enter here must match the SNMP write community string configured on the UPS Enter the IP address assigned to the second UPS s management card or Ethernet interface Note The UPS must already be configured with this address Second UPS IP address 10 230 67 51 The SNMP write community string configured in the second UPS is required Second UPS write community string private The string you enter here must match the SNMP write community string configured on the UPS The VCX system polls the UPS at regular intervals to get status information A shorter interval makes the system more responsive to UPS Status changes but consumes more network bandwidth The default value should work for most systems Polling Frequency seconds 30 The default polling interval is 30 seconds A low battery condition is reached when the battery charge reaches a defined threshold percentage Low Battery Threshold 25 Enter UPS battery threshold charge allowed before starting a shutdown of the VCX system The threshold charge
163. ering this command vex switchversion 7 0 xc The system displays several status messages and then reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 xc services 8 After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices Some multi site VCX systems have regional offices and branch offices Each branch office is associated with a regional office Multi site VCX systems can be categorized by the method used to implement messaging m In a multi site VCX system configured to use oca messaging the IP Messaging server is co located with the IP Telephony server at each branch office In this case each branch office provides messaging services for its users m In a multi site VCX system configured to use global messaging the IP Messaging server is located on the regional office Each branch office runs the IP Telephony server only In this case the regional office provides messaging services for users at each branch office Follow the procedures in this section to upgrade a multi site VCX system from version 6 0 to 7 0 The components in a multi site VCX system can be set up in many possible configurations The procedure
164. ervers 261 opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc Stop the Authentication and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Stop IP Messaging When the primary VCX server reboots IP Messaging restarts and must be stopped before you can upgrade the secondary VCX server However you should ensure IP Messaging is fully active before stopping it To check IP Messaging status enter the following commands su app cd opt 3com VCX UMS vcx scripts init d vexums status If the returned status is running stop IP Messaging by entering the following commands exit cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the secondary VCX server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the secondary VCX server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx all 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available 2 Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File 3 Install the license key See Installing a License Key File 4 S
165. ervice The logs are written to the directory that the back end server is run from opt 3com VCX lt schema gt log Enabling Server Logging SNMP Support Managing the Accounting Service and the Authentication and Directory Service 59 The files acctxmlconfig xml Accounting service and vcxdataconfig xml Authentication and Directory service each have a setting to enable server logging This is used to control the common logging function which is shared with all Tier 2 and Tier 3 devices This controls the logging of various status warning and error messages in the server For normal operation the default settings might be sufficient but for trouble locating purposes the various error warning informational and tracing log levels can also be used To enable message tracing Log in to the server hosting the service using the root account 2 Stop the service see Stopping a Service Enter the following command to change directories cd opt 3com VCX lt schema gt conf For schema enter acctxm1 for the Accounting service or enter vexdata for the Authentication and Directory service Edit the acctxmlconfig xml file or the vcxdataconfig xml file and enable server logging Example BES COMMONLOGG CONFIG lt Set Y or N to enable or Disable gt LOG INFO LOG FILE PATH 2 log LOG FILE NAME AuthServer LOG TO CONSOLE Y LOG TO FILE Y LOG TO SYSTEM Y LOG TRACE ON Y LOG INFO ON Y L
166. et must be entered as streeti 26 Granite Street In general it is advisable to avoid using characters such as a and single double quotation marks a Or angle brackets semicolon question mark exclamation mark or slash marks The password parameter sets the password the user enters to access the VCX User Provisioning web interface The user also must have a password to log in to the phone configured with the specified extension phone parameter value By default this phone password is 12345 Command Modes The user MAC command operates in three modes Add This is the default mode To add a new user account you must enter the user mac command with the uname and phone parameters all other parameters are optional Delete To delete a user account you enter the user MAC command with the delete and uname parameters Modify To modify a user account you enter the user MAC command with the modify and uname parameters plus the parameters you want to change If you want to change a user s phone extension you must enter the user MAC command with modify plus the phone parameter specifying the existing phone extension and the new phone parameter specifying the new phone extension The existing extension is required because the user may have more than one assigned phone extension Using Single User Mode 155 If you want to change the account s username
167. example shows the syntax required to initially configure a slave VCX server vex ups setup master N monitormultipleups N upsserver 10 230 63 5 When this command is executed m UPS monitoring is enabled on the current VCX server m The server is designated a slave m he VCX system will be serviced by a single UPS m The IP address of the master VCX server is 10 230 63 5 130 CHAPTER 8 MANAGING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES Adding Multiple UPS Support After the initial slave VCX server configuration you can change a parameter value by reentering the vcx ups setup command In the following example the IP address of the master VCX server is changed vex ups setup master N monitormultipleups N upsserver 10 230 63 7 Note that you must include all the vex ups setup command parameters even if you are only changing a single value This section describes how to configure a VCX system with multiple UPS devices There are two basic configuration options for a VCX system with multiple UPS devices m Two UPS devices can service a single VCX server with dual power supplies see Figure 2 Each power supply receives power from a separate UPS and if possible you should connect each UPS to different mains circuits The server remains fully operational when either UPS has mains power The server shuts down automatically only when both UPS devices are on battery and at or below the low battery threshold Figure 2 Two UPS
168. f MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press Enter to accept the default C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of the primary VCX server d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Upgrading the Primary VCX Server Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers 221 Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address of the secondary VCX server e ThebDo you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes 4 Enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to 1 the root account exit Stop IP Messaging first on the primary VCX server and then on the secondary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop Obtain a copy of the vex a11 7 1 yc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary VCX server and on the secondary VCX server The variable y indicates the version of VCX software for example vex all 7 0 3 tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number Next execute the following steps in the order listed a Upgrade the primary VCX server See Upgr
169. f ethO on the secondary VCX server e TheDo you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes During script execution messages appear describing the replication setup Messages also appear stating that firewall setup should allow communication between the primary IP Telephony server and the 232 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y secondary IP Telephony server These messages are a reminder firewall setup was performed during VCX software installation f TheHave you executed the ABOVE mentioned VCX FIREWALL steps y n prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes When the replication is complete Multi Master Replication Status is reported as NORMAL Do not continue to the next step until the replication is complete Note that replication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete g You can check the replication by entering the following command checkReplication 3 When the replication is complete enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Start the Authentication and Directory service on the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start Start the Tomcat process on the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server by entering the following
170. ferencing and UPS Monitoring The Adhoc Conferencing prompt appears In order to support ad hoc conferences with more than 3 participants the Adhoc Conference Service is used This service should be enabled on this server unless another Server dedicated to Adhoc Conferencing will be used instead If available a separate server typically provides greater capacity and may be shared among sites Configuring UPS Monitoring Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 211 Use the Adhoc service on this server Y N Y If you want this server to act as a multi caller up to 6 callers conferencing server enter y If not enter n The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts After completing the Adhoc Conferencing and UPS Monitoring prompts the server
171. files and directories are backed up if present but no error results if they are absent Files and directories not designated as optional do generate an error if they are not found at the time of backup The presence of optional files and directories has implications for the restore operation See Restoring a VCX Configuration This section describes the filename format location and contents of the VCX configuration backup file When you run the vex config backup command VCX software creates a backup file in gzipped tar format The individual files which represent the complete configuration are contained within this archive file Each backup file uses the following filename format hostname systemversion cfgtype timestamp tar gz Table 8 describes each element of the filename format Table8 VCX Configuration Backup File Naming Format Filename Element Description hostname Specifies the host name of system on which the vex config backup command was executed lt systemversion gt Specifies the active version of VCX software contained in the backup file 74 CHAPTER 4 BACKING UP AND RESTORING A VCX CONFIGURATION Examining a Backup File Table8 VCX Configuration Backup File Naming Format continued Filename Element Description cfgtype Specifies the configuration type of the system on which the vox config backup command was executed Possible values for type include a all Indica
172. for call 74000001 history 02 CALLEEFORWARDNUMBER Call Forwarded Number by Called sip 55550009 110 10 10 10 Party o4 INBOUNDENDPOINTTYPE Indicates the type of inbound end 6 point 2 Gateway 6 Terminal 9 Call processor 10 Others 11 Unknown 12 Redirect call processor 13 IP Messaging server 40 CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING THE CALL RECORDS SERVICE Table 7 CDR Field Descriptions and Values continued Tag Variable Description and Values Example 05 OUTBOUNDENDPOINTTYPE Indicates the type of outbound end 2 point 2 Gateway 6 Terminal 9 Call processor 10 Others 11 Unknown 12 Redirect call processor 13 IP Messaging server o6 TRANSFEREDTOURI URI that a call was transferred to 74000002 07 TRANSFERINGPARTYURI URI of the transferring Transferring 74000003 Party URI o8 REFERENCECALLID This is the reference text call ID for N A when silent monitor and barge in is used Not supported in this release 09 FORWARDINGPARTYURI Forwarding party URI N A Not supported in this release p1 GROUPNAME The name of a hunt group that was 1stShift defined when it was created p2 CALLQUEUEEXITTIME The call queue exit time in a hunt N A group the time stamp filed Not supported in this release p3 MEMBEREXTENSION The member extension used in a 21113 hunt group Viewing CDRs CDRS are stored on the server hosting the Accounting service In a multi site VCX system
173. from a group Log on to the VCX server hosting the Call Records service as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX bssxml bin config sh A menu of configuration options appears followed by the SELECT OPERATION prompt 2 Atthe prompt enter 203 3 The screen displays the number of configured Accounting services Press 5 p Enter to view the Accounting services clustered in their group until you reach the Enter Source Name to Delete prompt Enter the name of the Accounting service you want to delete from the group You are not uninstalling the Accounting service software you are just unassigning the Accounting service from a group Enter the password for the cworks user after the asterisks An asterisk appears at the Password prompts Enter and re enter the password for the user default username is cworks The cworks in the bracket after the prompt is not the default password You must enter the correct password for the user If nothing except the Enter key is given an 36 CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING THE CALL RECORDS SERVICE Listing All Configured Accounting Services Viewing Accounting Service Details empty password is accepted which is probably not the correct password for that user cworks on the Accounting service The Are you sure you want to Delete this Source prompt appears Enter y to delete the Accounting service The Accounting service is deleted from the group and you are returned to
174. g command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable Adhoc Conferencing and UPS Monitoring 176 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 3 The Adhoc Conferencing prompt appears In order to support ad hoc conferences with more than 3 participants the Adhoc Conference Service is used This service should be enabled on this server unless another Server dedicated to Adhoc Conferencing will be used instead If available a separate server typically provides greater capacity and may be shared among sites Use the Adhoc service on this server Y N Y If you want this server to act as a multi caller up to 6 callers conferencing server enter y If not enter n 4 The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UP
175. gion 1 b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE prompt appears Enter the number of Master sites To determine the number of Master sites associated with this server use the istVcxdata command See Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Telephony and Messaging Server for more information In this example there is one Master site Region 2 C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on this server the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 If there are more than one Master Sites this question repeats until the number of master sites specified in step b is reached e The Do you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes 5 10 Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 237 Enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Obtain a copy of the vex dataserver 7 1 yc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Authentication and Directory server The vari
176. gion 1 use local messaging and the branches in Region 2 use global messaging m Abranch that implements local messaging runs IP Telephony and IP Messaging server software Because this type of branch office includes IP Messaging services you can enable Global Voicemail Integration on the branch m Abranch that implements global messaging runs IP Telephony server software The IP Messaging server software running on a regional server provides messaging services for the branch Because this type of branch office receives its IP Messaging services from a regional IP Messaging server you cannot enable Global Voicemail Integration on the branch In this case you must enable Global Voicemail Integration on the regional server You can add existing IP Messaging servers to the Global Voicemail Integration system by running the vex reconfigure command on each server see Chapter 7 All upgrade commands are executed locally at the console CAUTION When upgrading a multi site VCX system upgrade the regional servers before upgrading the branch servers If you upgrade the branch servers first the database schema on the branches may not match the schema version on the region causing database replication failure To upgrade the branch offices in Region 1 local messaging Log in to the first branch office server as root Obtain a copy of the vex a11 7 1 yc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the branch
177. gion 2 and you have stopped database replication in both regions The following steps upgrade the databases in each region set up replication in each region and restart the Authentication and Directory server in each region You should still be logged in as root in each region 1 On the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 upgrade the replica on the Region 2 database by entering the following commands su cworks cd opt 3com VCX vexdata bin upgradeVcxdata The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id prompt appears 2 Enter the Site ID for Region 2 3 On the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 upgrade the replica of the Region 1 database by entering the following commands su cworks cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin upgradeVcxdata The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id prompt appears 4 Enter the Site ID for Region 1 5 Set up database replication on Region 1 by entering the following commands you should still be logged in to the Authentication and Directory server as cworks cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for Region 1 b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE prompt appears Enter the number of Master sites To determine the number of Master Sites associated
178. gle IBM server or a 3Com V6000 series Integrated Branch server The IBM server can run either the IP Telephony and IP Messaging configuration or the IP Telephony configuration The IP Telephony and IP Messaging configuration enables each branch office to have its own local IP Messaging service The IP Telephony configuration requires that each branch office obtain IP Messaging services from the regional office referred to as global messaging a The 3Com V6000 series Integrated Branch server runs the IP Telephony and IP Messaging configuration which enables local IP Messaging service As an alternative to the local or global messaging configuration options VCX software version 7 1 and higher supports Global Voicemail Integration Global Voicemail Integration links regional and branch office IP Messaging servers through a universal mailbox directory on a special IP Messaging server called the Global Voicemail Central Server GVCS When enabled Global Voicemail Integration allows a user to send reply to and forward voicemail messages to any other mailbox in the system The GVCS does not carry IP Messaging traffic it acts as a coordinator that monitors mailbox activity mailbox creation modification and deletion on each IP Messaging server in the system For example when a voice mailbox is created on a branch office the GVCS updates its global directory and notifies all the other offices to update their local directories VCX Mai
179. gle user mode or batch mode you can specify the user account attributes shown in Table 13 Table 13 User Account Attributes Attribute Description User Name Mandatory Specifies the username associated with the account The specified name must be unique This value is also required to change account attributes or to delete the account Password Optional Specifies the password the user enters to access the VCX User Provisioning interface If omitted uses the default password changeme Title Optional Specifies an honorific for example Mr or Ms First Name Optional Specifies the user s first name Middle Name Optional Specifies the user s middle name Last Name Optional Specifies the user s last name Email Optional Specifies the user s e mail address Street 1 Optional Specifies the user s street address Street 2 Optional Specifies the second part of the user s address for example an apartment number City Optional Specifies the user s city State Province Optional Specifies the user s state or province Country Zip Optional Specifies the user s country Optional Specifies the user s zip code Command Overview 151 Table 13 User Account Attributes continued Attribute Description Phone Address Mandatory Specifies the phone extension to be assigned to extension the user account The specified number must be unique on the Call Processor Site
180. grading the Regional Call Servers 203 Upgrading the Regional Call Records Server 205 Upgrading Branch Offices 207 Configuring UPS Monitoring 211 UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y Verifying Software Versions 216 Overview of a 7 1 x to 7 1 y Upgrade 217 Preliminary Steps 218 Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers 219 Upgrading the Primary VCX Server 221 Upgrading the Secondary VCX Server 222 Set Up Database Replication 223 Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 225 Upgrading the Primary IP Telephony Server 227 Upgrading the Primary IP Messaging Server 228 Upgrading the Secondary IP Telephony Server 229 Upgrading the Secondary IP Messaging Server 230 Set Up Database Replication 231 Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices 232 Upgrading the Call Records Server 233 Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 234 Multi Site VCX System Upgrade Order 235 Upgrading the Regional Authentication and Directory Servers 235 Upgrading the Regional IP Messaging Servers 242 Upgrading the Regional Call Servers 244 Upgrading the Regional Call Records Server 246 Upgrading the Branch Offices 247 UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 Verifying Software Versions 252 Overview of a 6 0 to 7 0 Upgrade 252 Post Upgrade Requirements 255 License Keys 256 Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers 258 Upgrading the Primary VCX Server 260 Upgrading the Secondary VCX Server 261 Set Up
181. guration interface before enabling Global Voicemail Integration on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers Refer to the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for more information and for configuration options Call server software Supported on multi site systems that include servers at regional offices with or without branch offices Call Records server software Supported on multi site systems installed on a single server for regional offices with or without branch offices Authentication and Directory server software Supported on multi site systems that include servers at regional offices with or without branch offices You should upgrade each server from a locally attached console The upgrade procedure includes a reboot of each upgraded server If you perform an upgrade remotely using a secure shell client for example you will be logged out when the reboot occurs When you log back in it may not be apparent that the upgrade has completed If you enter commands before the upgrade has finished the upgrade will fail VCX version 7 1 software includes the following three options Adhoc Conferencing Allows a server running the Call Processing service to act as a multi caller up to 6 callers conferencing server Global Voicemail Integration Allows a server running the IP Messaging service to integrate its voicemail system with other Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers
182. guration options Depending on your configuration you may need to upgrade the following VCX software components and configurations IP Telephony and IP Messaging server software Supported on Single site systems with two servers a Multi site systems that include servers at regional offices but no branch offices a Multi site systems that include servers at regional offices and servers at branch offices that use local IP Messaging IP Telephony server software Supported on Single site systems with four servers a Multi site systems that include servers at regional offices and servers at branch offices that use global IP Messaging IP Messaging server software Supported on a Single site systems with four servers 170 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 p Configuring New Features Multi site systems that include servers at regional offices and servers at branch offices that use global or local IP Messaging A pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS to enable Global Voicemail Integration on an entire IP Messaging system A GVCS coordinates mailbox creation and mailbox updates on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers The version 7 0 to version 7 1 upgrade procedure allows you to enable Global Voicemail Integration on servers running IP Messaging software However you must install IP Messaging software on a GVCS and then set up the GVCS through the IP Messaging administrator confi
183. h of the regional offices m To upgrade the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server follow the instructions in Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers earlier in this appendix wm To upgrade the Call Records server see the following section Upgrading the Call Records Server All upgrade commands are executed locally at the console To upgrade the Call Records server Log in to the Call Records server as root Stop all VCX processes on the Call Records server by entering the following commands cd etc init d vex stop Obtain a copy of the vex bss 7 0 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Call Records server Enter these commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vox bss 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y 274 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available 5 Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File 6 Install the license key See Installing a License Key File 7 Change to the new software version by ent
184. hanged DHCP state Hostname disabled test three IP Interfaces Device etho eth1 CONFIGURATION SUMMARY IP Address Network Mask Default Gateway 10 230 64 40 255742552550 10 230 64 254 10 230 64 41 255729525570 10 230 64 254 110 CHAPTER 7 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued DNS Servers 10 25 10 31 10 26 10 31 10 27 10 31 Search Domains ne 3com com NTP Servers 10 35 1051 10 36 10 51 Time Zone America New York Is all of the above information correct yes Press the Enter or Return key to accept the information To change any of the parameters enter no Please wait while the wizard completes Saving configuration Done Restarting network services to apply changes Shutting down interface etho OK Shutting down interface ethl OK Shutting down loopback interface OK Setting network parameters OK Bringing up loopback interface OK Bringing up interface etho OK Bringing up interface ethl OK Shutting down ntpd OK ntpd Synchronizing with time server OK Starting ntpd OK Stopping VCX CommonAgent OK Starting VCX CommonAgent OK Stopping httpd OK Starting httpd OK OK Sample VCX Server Reconfiguration 111 Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued Services running on this server need to communicate with other systems and devices in order to op
185. has no errors see Preliminary Steps and then drop replication by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication The drop replication script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter the site ID configured for Region 2 196 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE prompt appears Enter the number of Master sites To determine the number of Master sites associated with this server use the istVcxdata command See Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Telephony and Messaging Server for more information In this example there is one Master site Region 1 C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on this server the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 If there are more than one Master Sites this question repeats until the number of master sites specified in step b is reached e TheDo you want to continue with the above settings n y
186. he VCX commands you can use to manage and view VCX components This appendix includes the following topic m Command Descriptions 330 APPENDIX E VCX COMMANDS Command Descriptions This guide describes how to maintain your VCX system Most maintenance operations require entering commands to perform a particular task or to run a script The tables in this appendix describe all available VCX commands Many of these commands are used and described elsewhere in this guide to perform maintenance tasks In this case the tables provide cross references to the relevant topics Many commands have required or optional arguments For these commands you can use the help argument to view command syntax Table 16 lists commands you can use to reconfigure or back up a VCX configuration Table 16 VCX Configuration and Backup Commands Command Description vox reconfigure Changes IP addresses or most other first time setup parameters certain parameters cannot be reconfigured See Chapter 7 vox config network Changes network settings Typically invoked as part of the vcx reconfigure operation However you can use this command to modify the time zone setting for a machine See Changing a Daylight Saving and Time Zone Configuration vcx config services Changes a service configuration Typically invoked as part of show a higher level script However you can use this command with the show argument to return a multi p
187. he assumption that upgrading from version 7 1 x to 7 1 y changed the operating system version from 4 2 0 to 4 2 1 Log in as root To determine which operating system versions are available enter this command vex os query The output from this command appears OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 0 dev hda2 A B 4 2 1 dev hda3 B active The operating system versions that you see may vary from the example shown The order of the A and B versions may be reversed depending on the upgrade history of the system When you are downgrading use the earlier of the two operating system versions in this command vex os switch 4 2 0 To confirm that you have selected the operating system version that you want repeat the vex os query command Verify that the word selected appears in the Status column for the version that you want Example OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 0 dev hda2 A selected B Bod a dev hda3 B active Reboot the Server Reboot the system using this command reboot When the system reboots it starts VCX 7 1 x services Downgrading from 7 0 to 6 0 317 Downgrading from 7 0 to 6 0 Important Considerations Follow the procedures in this section to downgrade your VCX system from version 7 0 to 6 0 Before performing a downgrade keep these considerations in mind Downgrades are typically performed for one of the following reasons a You have successfully upgraded your VCX s
188. he local cworks account IP Messaging includes support for Text To Speech TTS via one or more external servers To use this feature you must answer Y here Is Text To Speech TTS enabled N Press the Enter or Return key to accept the default answer In this sample script the default answer N indicates that no text to speech service was originally enabled on this server Sample VCX Server Reconfiguration 119 Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued Do you wish to change any of the IP Messaging System parameters N Press the Enter or Return key to accept the data that you have accepted or changed To review the data and make additional changes enter Y meeeme ee Configuring additional parameters for Auth amp Dir Service At a branch office the password for access to the regional office system s cworks account is required At a regional office or on a standalone System specify the cworks password for access to this system Login Password Login Password confirm This cworks password is used for authentication when replicating this server s database on a remote Authentication and Directory server This password must be the same as the cworks account password on the remote server It is not necessarily the same as the password used to log in to the local cworks account configured earlier in this script Do you wish to change any of the Auth amp Dir Service parameters N Press the Ente
189. he primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start Start the Tomcat process on the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server by entering the following command S70tomcat start Start IP Messaging on the primary VCX server by entering the following command S60ums start Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers Single site VCX systems can have either two servers or four servers m Ina two server configuration each server runs IP Telephony server software and IP Messaging server software m Ina four server configuration one pair of servers runs IP Telephony server software the second pair of servers runs IP Messaging server software Follow the procedures in this section to upgrade the four server configuration at a single site from one version of VCX software 7 1 x to a later version 7 1 y Before you begin the upgrade procedures on the four servers perform these steps Log in as root on the primary IP Telephony server and on the secondary IP Telephony server Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary IP Telephony server and then on the secondary IP Telephony server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Ensure that database replication has no errors see Preliminary Steps and then drop replication on the primary IP Telephony server by entering these commands
190. hemas To create the version 6 0 database schema perform the following steps first on the primary server then on the secondary server Log in to the server as root user Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts firstboot F20vcxdata Go to the next section Restore VCX Databases Restore VCX Databases To restore the database on the primary and secondary servers that are running the IP Telephony and Messaging or IP Telephony software configuration see Restoring the VCX Authentication and Directory Server Database You must restore the database on both primary and secondary servers prior to starting database replication Go to the next section Restart VCX Database Replication Downgrading from 7 0 to 6 0 321 Restart VCX Database Replication On Master Definition Site that is running the IP Telephony and IP Messaging or IP Telephony software configuration restart database replication Log in to the Master Definition Site the primary server as cworks user Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication When the script prompts you enter the site ID of the Master Site 4 Wait at least 20 minutes to allow time for database replication to be completed Enter the following commands to verify that replication is complete cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin checkReplication The message that appears should contain the word NORMAL If it does not wait for a few m
191. hen on the secondary server prior to rebooting step 5 Both servers must be switched to the same operating system before rebooting To confirm that you have selected the operating system version that you want repeat the vex os query command Verify that the word selected appears in the Status column for the version that you want vex os query OS Version Partition Label Status A 3 4 0 dev hda2 A selected B 4 2 1 dev hda3 B active Enter the following command to reboot the system reboot When the system reboots it starts VCX 6 0 services For multi site VCX systems upgrades and downgrades must be performed in a specific sequence The components in a multi site VCX system can be set up in many possible configurations The procedures in this section are based on a multi site VCX system that includes two regions Region 1 and Region 2 with multiple branch offices in each region If you have successfully upgraded the entire multi site VCX system you should downgrade servers in the following order a Downgrade the branch servers in each region a Downgrade the Authentication and Directory server in each region p Downgrading from 7 0 to 6 0 323 a Downgrade the IP Messaging servers in each region a Downgrade the Call servers in each region a Downgrade the Call Records server If the upgrade process fails while upgrading any type of VCX server consult with your 3Com representative before attempting to downgrade
192. hentication and Directory server After a successful upgrade of a regional office if an upgrade of any branch office server is unsuccessful contact your 3Com Support for assistance and downgrade that branch office server The person performing the downgrade should be trained in VCX operation and procedures and be familiar with VCX terminology 318 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE p Downgrading a Single Site System The downgrade procedure does not remove VCX version 7 0 software from your VCX system If you have configured a VCX server running version 7 0 software for RAID operation you cannot downgrade that server to version 6 0 software VCX servers running software versions prior to the 7 0 release do not support RAID configuration If a VCX server enabled for RAID operation must be downgraded to a software version prior to 7 0 the server must be rebuilt Contact your 3Com representative This procedure describes how to downgrade VCX single site systems Single site VCX systems can have either two servers or four servers m Ina two server configuration each server runs IP Telephony server software and IP Messaging server software The downgrade steps described in the following sections must be performed on each server wm Ina four server configuration one pair of servers runs IP Telephony server software the second pair of servers runs IP Messaging server software The downgrade steps described in the f
193. his command returns a list all of the installed releases and indicates the running VCX version 7 1 10 11 2006 04 20 active 7 1 9 10 2006 04 13 installed 7189 2006 04 06 installed 7178 2006 04 01 installed Overview of a 7 1 x to 7 1 y Upgrade 217 Overview of a 7 1 x to 7 1 y Upgrade This section provides an overview of the procedures required to upgrade your VCX system from one version of VCX software 7 1 x to a later version 7 1 y These procedures upgrade the VCX system to an operational state This section assumes the VCX system is successfully operating at version 7 1 x before you perform the upgrade This appendix describes how to upgrade a VCX server by entering commands at a locally attached console You can also upgrade a VCX server remotely by using 3Com Corporation s Enterprise Management Suite EMS EMS is an SNMP based client server application Refer to the Enterprise Management Suite User Guide for VCX V7000 Components for information All components in a VCX system must run the same version of VCX software This requirement has the following implications m You cannot upgrade or downgrade one component in a VCX system and not upgrade or downgrade the other system components m f you add a server to an existing VCX system for example a branch office the VCX components on the new server must be installed with the same version of the VCX software as the existing components CAUTION 3Com Corporation strong
194. his setting tO AUTO CLEAN IF NO LATEST UPDATE Y to enable self cleaning on the Accounting service The variable AUTO CLEAN IF NO LATEST UPDATE INTERVAL is set to 96 hours four days by default A smaller value initiates the self cleaning more often A larger value allows the QDRs to remain on the Accounting server longer Save your changes You can also configure the Accounting service to be self cleaning by modifying the vox gos performance monitor xml mib mib variables m vcxQoSPerformanceMonitorXmlAutoCleanIfLatestStale m vcxQoSPerformanceMonitorXmlAutoCleanIfLatestStalePeriod Verifying Service Operation Managing the Common Agent To determine if the Accounting Service Authentication and Directory Service Common Agent IP Messaging system or the Call Processor associated monitor process is running log in to the appropriate server as root and enter ps A grep cw In the list that appears verify that these process names are displayed m CW acctxml Accounting Service a cw_vcxdata Authentication and Directory Service a CW cagent Common Agent Cw ipums IP Messaging System CW procmon Monitor process associated with the Call Processor Use the procedures outlined in the next sections to start or stop one of these processes The Enterprise Management Suite EMS connects to the Accounting Service Authentication and Directory Service the Call Records Service the IP Messaging Service
195. holders CONTENTS ABOUT THIS GUIDE Conventions 12 Related Documentation 13 Comments 14 VCX SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW Network based Telephony 16 VCX Software Components 16 VCX Hardware Configurations 18 Single Site Configurations 19 Multi Site Configurations 19 VCX Maintenance Tasks 21 About VCX Passwords 23 VCX File and Directory Name Guidelines 24 CONFIGURING THE CALL RECORDS SERVICE Call Records Service Overview 28 Configuring an Accounting Service Group 29 Adding an Accounting Group 30 Viewing Configured Group Details 30 Enabling and Disabling Groups 31 Deleting Groups 31 Adding Accounting Services to the Call Records Service 32 Editing Accounting Service Information in a Group 34 Deleting an Accounting Service from a Group 35 Listing All Configured Accounting Services 36 Viewing Accounting Service Details 36 Managing CDRs and Super CDRs 37 Understanding CDR Fields 37 Viewing CDRs 40 Viewing Super CDRs 41 QoS Monitoring Statistics 41 MANAGING VCX SERVERS Managing the Tomcat Web Server 46 Verifying Tomcat Server Status 46 Stopping the Tomcat Server 46 Starting the Tomcat Server 46 Clearing the Tomcat Cache 47 Changing a Daylight Saving and Time Zone Configuration 47 Managing Log and CDR Files 48 Tomcat and IP Messaging Log File Maintenance 48 CDR File Maintenance 49 QDR File Maintenance 50 Verifying Service Operation 51 Managing the Common Agent 51 Starting the Common Agent 52 Stopping the Common
196. ication status execute the following steps on the server hosting the Authentication and Directory services database Log in using the cworks account Enter ed opt 3com VCX vexdata bin Enter checkReplication The returned status should be NORMAL If replication errors need to be cleared Enter deleteReplicationErrors T CAUTION Do not attempt an upgrade if there are replication errors that cannot be deleted Depending on your configuration you may need to upgrade the following VCX software components and configurations IP Telephony and IP Messaging server software Supported on a Single site systems with two servers a Multi site systems that include servers at regional offices but no branch offices a Multi site systems that include servers at regional offices and servers at branch offices that use local IP Messaging IP Telephony server software Supported on Single site systems with four servers a Multi site systems that include servers at regional offices and servers at branch offices that use global IP Messaging IP Messaging server software Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers 219 Supported on a Single site systems with four servers a Multi site systems that include servers at regional offices and servers at branch offices that use global or local IP Messaging A pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS to enable Global Voicemail
197. ice using the root account Stop the Common Agent service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX commagent vcx scripts init d commagent stop Stop the service on which you want to enable SNMP support see Stopping a Service Enter the following command to change directories cd opt 3com VCX lt schema gt conf For schema enter acctxm1 for the Accounting service or enter vexdata for the Authentication and Directory service Edit the acctxmlconfig xml file or the vcxdataconfig xmI file Example lt Enable or Disable SNMP Common Agent gt M lt Interface 0 OFF 1 ON M ENABLED VALUE 1 gt Managing the SIP Phone Downloader 61 6 Start the Common Agent service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX commagent vcx scripts init d commagent start Start the service see Starting a Service Managing the SIP Phone Downloader Starting the SIP Phone Downloader 1 Stopping the SIP Phone Downloader 1 Restarting the SIP Phone Downloader 1 The SIP Phone Downloader loads an application image on to a 3Com phone which enables SIP support on the phone To start the SIP Phone Downloader Log in to the server hosting the SIP phone downloader using the root or vcx account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX devdnldsvr vcx scripts init d S90devdnldsvr start To stop the SIP phone downloader application Log in to the server hosti
198. ice which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts After completing the UPS Monitoring prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before presiding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Enter the following commands to stop the Authentication and Directory server on Region 2 cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop 198 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 At this point you have upgraded the Authentication and Directory server on Region 1 and Re
199. ided to you UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGENDS If you are a United States government agency then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to you subject to the following United States Government Legend All technical data and computer software is commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense Software is delivered as Commercial Computer Software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided in 3Com s standard commercial license for the Software Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252 227 7015 Nov 1995 or FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 whichever is applicable You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in or delivered to you in conjunction with guide Unless otherwise indicated 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may not be registered in other countries 3Com and the 3Com logo are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation VCX is a trademark of 3Com Corporation Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation Other brand and product names may be registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective
200. ient out monitoring 49 enabling Accounting service groups 31 message tracing 58 server logging 59 SNMP support 60 exporting all tables 85 single table 85 table data 85 table data for a single table 85 table data for all tables in a schema 85 F filename guidelines 24 files app out monitoring 49 catalina out monitoring 48 cpy4 out monitoring 49 eml_client out monitoring 49 localhost_access_log 48 monitoring file size 48 ums_cbipi log monitoring 48 G Global Voicemail Central Server 20 170 global voicemail integration 20 170 set up during upgrade 170 l importing saved table data 86 IP Messaging service 17 monitoring log files 48 restarting 62 starting 62 status 62 342 CHAPTER INDEX stopping 62 IP Telephony and IP Messaging Server configuring replication 91 IP Telephony Server configuring replication 91 L license keys 256 listing configured Accounting services 36 localhost access log monitoring 48 logging Accounting service 59 Authentication and Directory service 59 M maintenance tasks 21 managing CDRs and Super CDRs 37 log and CDR files 48 message tracing enabling 58 Multi Master Replication 90 See also replication multi site configuration options 19 P passwords changing 24 VCX system 23 phone extensions assigning automatically 150 primary servers 18 Provisioning service 17 Q QDR storage managing 50 QoS statistics 41 R region to
201. igured in two ways a Multiple regional offices all of which are self contained but interconnected Each office includes two servers each running the IP Telephony and IP Messaging configuration One of the offices also has a Call Records Server which runs on a separate server and provides billing information CDRs to all of the offices There are no branch offices m A single regional office that supports one or more branch offices a Multiple regional offices each of which supports one or more branch offices One of the regional offices contains a Two servers running the Call Server configuration 20 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW One or two servers running the IP Messaging services configuration The number of servers depends on whether the branch offices are configured with IP Messaging services or obtain that service from the regional office One server running the Authentication and Directory Server configuration One server running the Call Records Server configuration The other regional offices contain Two servers running the Call Server configuration One or two servers running the IP Messaging services configuration The number of servers depends on whether the branch offices are configured with IP Messaging services or obtain that service from the regional office One server running the Authentication and Directory Server configuration m Each branch office can operate with either a sin
202. iguring a VCX server enables you to modify its networking parameters and the configuration of the services that run on the server You may decide to reconfigure a VCX server if for example you are moving it to a new subnetwork or if you are expanding your VCX system to include additional servers and need all servers to work together in the new configuration If you reconfigure any server in a VCX system you must usually reconfigure all of the other servers in the system because the servers all share information A significant step in the reconfiguration is dropping database replication Reconfigure primary servers and then secondary servers CAUTION Do not reboot a server immediately after reconfiguring it Instead after you have reconfigured all servers reboot them all at once To reconfigure a VCX server enter this command on the console vex reconfigure CAUTION Do not run this command using a remote ssh login The script restarts networking at one point and you will lose your connection You cannot use the vex reconfigure command to change these items Configuration Type You cannot modify a Call Processing Server to become an IP Messaging Server a Role You cannot change a primary server to a secondary server Also you cannot change the services a server has been configured to supply For example a server configured during VCX software installation to provide Call Records services cannot be reconfigured to
203. in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts 4 The Global Voicemail Integration prompt appears When multiple IP Messaging systems are in use for example at a region and one or more branches the Global Voicemail capability allows these systems to act as a single unified voicemail system Say yes here if this system participates in Global Voicemail Is Global Voicemail enabled N a If you have installed and configured through the IP Messaging administrator configuration interface a pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS to enable global voicemail integration you can answer y to this prompt and go to step b If not enter n and go to step 5 b The upgrade script asks if this server as a Global Voicemail Central Server In a Global Voicemail system one site s IPMSG servers are designated as the Central Servers and coordinate the 184 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 Upgrading the Secondary IP Telephony Server 1 feature s operation Typically the Central Servers are at one of the regional sites Is this a Central Server for Global Voicemail N If this server has been configured as a Globa
204. in this section on a console attached to the regional Call server To upgrade the Call Records server Log in to the Call Records server as root Obtain a copy of the vex bss 7 0 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Call Records server Upgrading the Branch Offices Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 285 3 Enter these commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx bss 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are E Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File 5 Install the license key See Installing a License Key File 6 Change to the new software version by entering this command vcx switchversion 7 0 xc The system displays several status messages and then reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 xc services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of
205. inition Site The schema name and IP addresses of the Master Definition Site primary server and Master Site secondary server are listed The Do you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to configure replication between the primary and secondary regional server After 20 minutes check the status of the replication To check replication enter these commands while logged in as cworks cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin checkReplication When the NORMAL Status returned you know the replication is configured Login as root and enter these commands on the primary and secondary servers cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start S70tomcat start Replication is now configured and running Manually Configuring Region to Region Replication 93 Manually Configuring Region to Region Replication For multi site configurations with 2 Regions each region contains a replicated copy of the other region s database For example consider a multi site configuration with two regions Region 1 and Region 2 Each region has two Authentication and Directory server databases m R1DB is the primary database located on Region 1 m R2DB is Region 255 replicated database located on Region 1 m R2DBis the primary database located on Region 2 m R1DB is Region 155 replicated database located on Region 2 This section provides instructions on how to install a replicated VCX Authentication and Di
206. inutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Repeat steps 1 through 8 for all the other branch office servers in Region 1 To upgrade the branch offices in Region 2 global messaging Log in to the first branch office server as root Obtain a copy of the vex softswitch 7 1 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the branch office server The variable y indicates the version of VCX software for example vex all 7 1 3c tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number To start the upgrade process enter the following commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcox softswitch 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Secum secus Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable Adhoc Con
207. ion If you are downgrading a IP Messaging server go to Switch Operating System Versions and Reboot Stop VCX Database Replication If the server is running the IP Telephony and Messaging or the IP Telephony software configuration you must stop database replication These steps are executed on the primary server only Also ensure that you have executed the vex switchversion command on both the primary and secondary IP Telephony and Messaging or the IP Telephony servers before stopping database replication on the primary server CAUTION If the server is running the IP Messaging software configuration do not perform the steps in this section Log in to the Master Definition Site the primary server as cworks user 2 Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin dropReplication 3 When the script prompts you enter the site ID of the Master Site 4 Go to the next section Remove Version 7 0 Database Schemas 320 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE Remove Version 7 0 Database Schemas To remove the version 7 0 database schema perform the following steps first on the primary server then on the secondary server Log in to the server as cworks user Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin dropVexdata When the script prompts you enter the site name for the database 4 Go to the next section Create Version 6 0 Database Schemas Create Version 6 0 Database Sc
208. ion is complete enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Start the Authentication and Directory service on the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start Start the Tomcat process on the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server by entering the following command S70tomcat start 264 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 Start IP Messaging on the primary VCX server by entering the following command S60ums start Run the admincfg script on both the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server See Post Upgrade Requirements Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers Single site VCX systems can have either two servers or four servers m Ina two server configuration each server runs IP Telephony server software and IP Messaging server software m In a four server configuration one pair of servers runs IP Telephony server software the second pair of servers runs IP Messaging server software Follow the procedures in this section to upgrade the four server configuration at a single site from VCX software 6 0 to version 7 0 All upgrade commands are executed locally at the console Before you begin the upgrade procedures on the four servers perform these steps Log in as root on the primary IP Telephony server and on the secondary
209. ion on command usage fullauto Displays complete information about the backup file version operating system version components and so on a version Displays the version of VCX software for the components contained in the backup file a osversion Displays the version of the VCX operating system contained in the backup file components lists the name of each component and VCX version for each component contained in the backup file date Displays the date and time the backup file was created a files lists the configuration files and directories contained in the backup file a network Displays the VCX operating system network configuration contained in the backup file machineid Displays the machine id of the backed up system contained in the backup file For backup filename enter the name of the backup file you want to examine See About the Backup File for a description of backup filenames Restoring a VCX Configuration This section describes how to use the vex config restore command to restore a VCX configuration backup file When you run the vex config restore command by default the restore operation first creates a new backup of the VCX system s current state This provides a fallback if the restore operation fails In this case the system generates a message indicating the new backup has been created but the system does not attempt to restore the
210. ipt continued An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N Y If you do not have a UPS installed and enter N or press Return or Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed It is possible to use multiple UPS units to power a single server if the server has redundant power supplies with separate power connections Will multiple UPS s power this server N y A single UPS can power one or more VCX systems A UPS Master communicates directly with a UPS while a Slave communicates with the Master to get UPS status Only one Master system should monitor a given UPS If this VCX system is the only one connected to the UPS say Y here Note a VCX system s UPS Monitoring role is independent of any other role it may have within a VCX deployment Do you want this server to be the master N Y If you answer N to indicate that this server is a slave not the master you will be prompted to enter the IP address of the master UPS Monitoring requires a network enabled UPS Enter the IP address assigned to the UPS s management card or Ethernet int
211. is expressed as a percentage of remaining battery power The default is 2596 The range is from 2596 to 75 Do you wish to change any of the UPS Monitoring parameters N n Sample VCX Server Reconfiguration 117 Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued The hostname of the other IP Messaging system is needed in order to set up Intelligent Mirroring redundancy with this system Hostname of peer IP Messaging system test four Enter the host name of the Secondary VCX Server as it will be defined after the reconfiguration When multiple IP Messaging systems are in use for example at a region and one or more branches the Global Voicemail capability allows these systems to act as a single unified voicemail system Say yes here if this system participates in Global Voicemail Is Global Voicemail enabled N y In a Global Voicemail system one site s IPMSG servers are designated as the Central Servers and coordinate the feature s operation Typically the Central Servers are at one of the regional sites Is this a Central Server for Global Voicemail N Dy If you answer N to indicate that this is not the Central Server you will be prompted to enter the Central Server IP address IP Messaging includes an optional ability to archive messages to an external server Is Message Archival enabled N Press the Enter or Return key to accept the default answer In this sample script the default answer N indicates th
212. ise Management Suite EMS version 2 3 QOS statistics also generate QDRs Quality of Service Detail Records 42 CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING THE CALL RECORDS SERVICE in XML format and stored on the Accounting server in the opt 3com VCX acctxmi gos directory You can use a third party application to download the QDRs and create reports QoS monitoring as implemented on a VCX system covers 3Com IP telephones models 310x as endpoints The EMS administrator can m Configure one or more monitored endpoints or subnets m Configure thresholds for QoS statistics generation by the phones on those monitored subnets wm Configure alarm thresholds for trap notifications based on QoS parameters m View generated statistics using SNMP The following QoS statistics can be recorded at the end of every call for each leg of the call These statistics are recorded in the call history table on the Accounting server and available through EMS m Codec Sample Size m SIP Call ID a Codec Type m Device Type m Computed Mean Opinion Score m Jitter m Packet Loss m Round Trip Delay m Call Start Time wm Call End Time wm Caller Extension and IP address m Called Party extension and IP address In addition to call statistics the following aggregate average statistics are available at the endpoint or subnet level depending on how the statistics collection is configured These parameters are set to default thresholds using EMS on the call proces
213. istrators can log in to the interface and access Manager related menu options m Access to the Central Manager and the VCX Administrator provisioning interface requires a username and password see the VCX Administration Guide If you have changed the default password the procedure for upgrading VCX software from version 6 0 to 7 0 may change your password back to the default Running the script allows you to reset the default password 256 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 License Keys N You must execute the following steps on each server running the Call Processor service Depending on your VCX system configuration these servers could include the IP Telephony and IP Messaging server the Call server and the IP Telephony server You do not need to run the admincfg script on other types of VCX servers for example the IP Messaging server To run the admincfg script Log on the primary VCX server running the Call Processor service as the root user Run the password management script by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX tomcat scripts admincfg Follow the script prompts to change the password When the script finishes enter Y to ensure that the changes take effect You must use uppercase if you use lowercase y the script will not preserve your changes Repeat steps 1 through 4 on each server running the Call Processor service You must obtain and install a license key file fo
214. itch Operating System Versions and Reboot Downgrading a Branch Office If a downgrade from version 7 0 to version 6 0 is required on a branch server in a multi site VCX system follow the procedures described in this section A branch must be running the same version of VCX software as the regional servers hosting the branch This section assumes that all of the regional servers and the branch have been upgraded successfully If the branch upgrade failed contact your 3Com representative before attempting to downgrade to the previous release Downgrading from 7 0 to 6 0 325 To downgrade a branch server Log in as root on the primary and secondary regional Call servers and the branch Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary Call server then on the secondary Call server and then on the branch server by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Log in as cworks on the regional Authentication and Directory server the Master Definition site associated with the branch and enter the following commands to stop replication on branch database cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin dropReplication When the script prompts you enter the site ID of the branch On the regional Authentication and Directory server associated with the branch still logged in as cworks enter the following commands to delete the branch schema cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin dropVexdata When the script promp
215. l Processor Table 21 Remote CLI Command Descriptions Command Description exit Quits the Remote CLI application shutdown Shuts down the Call Processor gracefully version Shows the software version of the Call Processor and the version of the Distributed Message Routing DMR 3Com proprietary protocol 338 APPENDIX F CALL PROCESSOR COMMAND LINE INTERFACE COMMANDS Table 21 Remote CLI Command Descriptions continued Command Description show Lists all of the Call Processor tables that are used for configuration Use the command with a table name as a parameter to view details of that table config Lists all of the configurable tables Use the command with a table name as a parameter to configure that table diagnostic Allows a user to make run time only modifications to log levels exec Causes a plugin to execute a plugin specific command To display available commands for a plugin issue the name of one of the plugins listed from the plugin CLI command along with the execute command statistics Displays various types of counters for a particular plugin To display available statistics for a plugin issue the name of one of the plugins listed from the plugin CLI command along with the statistics command send Sends a message to a plugin dump Configures a plugin to display troubleshooting information messageTrace Turns on logging for all DMR messages within
216. l Voicemail Central Server enter y and go to step 5 If you answer n to indicate that this is not a Central Server you will be prompted to enter the Central Server IP address After completing the UPS Monitoring and Global Voicemail Integration prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the secondary IP Telephony server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the secondary IP Telephony server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcox softswitch 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are cube AL Een uen Installation Completed Successfully VCX ve
217. l status messages and then reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 xc Authentication and Directory service After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc Enter the following commands to stop the Authentication and Directory server on Region 1 cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Log in as root to the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 Stop database replication by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication The drop replication script starts Follow the procedure described in step 4 278 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 15 16 17 21 22 Enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Obtain a copy of the vex dataserver 7 0 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Authentication and Directory server The variable x indicates the version of VCX software for example vex dataserver 7 0 3c tar that will replace version 6 0 The letter c is always appended to the version number Enter these commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx dataserver 7 0
218. l the number of master sites specified in step b is reached e TheDno you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes 5 Enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit 6 Obtain a copy of the vex dataserver 7 0 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Authentication and Directory server The variable x indicates the version of VCX software for example vex a11 7 0 3c tar that will replace version 6 0 The letter c is always appended to the version number 7 Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 277 Enter these commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx dataserver 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 x install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are E Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available 8 Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File 11 12 13 14 Install the license key See Installing a License Key File Change to the new software version by entering this command vex switchversion 7 0 xc The system displays severa
219. layed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts 5 The Global Voicemail Integration prompt appears When multiple IP Messaging systems are in use for example at a region and one or more branches the Global Voicemail capability allows these systems to act as a single unified voicemail system Say yes here if this system participates in Global Voicemail Is Global Voicemail enabled N a If you have installed and configured through the IP Messaging administrator configuration interface a pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS to enable global voicemail integration you can answer y to this prompt and go to step b If not enter n and go to step 6 b The upgrade script asks if this server as a Global Voicemail Central Server In a Global Voicemail system one site s IPMSG servers are designated as the Central Servers and coordinate the feature s operation Typically the Central Servers are at one of the regional sites Is this a Central Server for Global Voicemail N If this server has been configured as a Global Voicemail Central Server enter y and go to step 6 If you answer n to indicate that this is not a Central Server you will be prompted to enter the Central Server IP address Upgrading the Secondary VCX Server Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers 175 6 After completing the Adhoc Confere
220. lement messaging In a multi site VCX system configured to use oca messaging the IP Messaging server is co located with the IP Telephony server at each branch office In this case each branch office provides messaging services for its users In a multi site VCX system configured to use global messaging the IP Messaging server is located on the regional office Each branch office runs the IP Telephony server only In this case the regional office provides messaging services for users at each branch office In version 7 1 multi site VCX systems you can configure branch and regional sites to use Global Voicemail Integration Each location must be running IP Messaging services which means that in a multi site system configured to use global messaging you cannot enable Global Voicemail Integration on a branch You can however enable Global Voicemail Integration on the region providing IP Messaging services to the branch This service is provided by a pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS to enable global voicemail integration on an entire IP Messaging system A GVCS coordinates mailbox creation and mailbox updates on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers The version 7 1 upgrade procedure allows you to enable global voicemail integration on servers running IP Messaging software However you must install IP Messaging software on a GVCS and then set up the GVCS through the IP Messaging administrator configuration in
221. ll Records server This includes all the regional offices primary and secondary and any branch offices To add Accounting services to the Call Records service Log on to the VCX server hosting the Call Records service as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX bssxml bin config sh A menu of configuration options appears followed by the SELECT OPERATION prompt Enter 201 A list of configured Accounting service groups appears followed by the Enter the Group Name prompt Enter the name of the group the name is not case sensitive If you choose to add Accounting services to the default VCX supplied Accounting service group defaultGroup you must enable the group This group is disabled by default The Enter Unique Source Name prompt appears Adding Accounting Services to the Call Records Service 33 4 Enter a unique identifier that you want to assign to the Accounting p service For instance if it is a branch office in Joliet IL you could use branchJolietlL as the identifier There is no name length limit for an Accounting service identifier The Enter Source Address prompt appears Enter the IP address or hostname of the Accounting service you are associating with this group In a multi site configuration the Accounting service uses either the ethO or eth network interface and runs on the server that performs call processing Depending on which Accounting service you are adding enter the appro
222. llowing commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop exit To start the Tomcat process Log in into the server hosting the Tomcat server using the tomcat account Enter the following commands Clearing the Tomcat Cache Changing a Daylight Saving and Time Zone Configuration 47 cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat start exit If your browser generates page errors while accessing the VCX Central Manager or any of the web based management interfaces VCX Administrator VCX User or IP Messaging such as page not found HH page doesn t render page doesn t render correctly or exception faults you may need to clear the Tomcat cache To clear the Tomcat cache enter these commands Log in into the server hosting the Tomcat server using the tomcat account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop cd opt 3com VCX tomcat work rm rf cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat start Changing a Daylight Saving and Time Zone Configuration If you need to modify the daylight saving and time zone configuration for a VCX system you should use the vex con ig network tool Although it appears time zone and daylight saving time settings can be modified using the Enterprise Management Suite EMS all configurations are not currently supported you cannot change the original daylight saving configuration status Also EMS does not support as many time z
223. ly recommends that you perform backups of your VCX system on a regular basis for example weekly These backups should include provisioning database and voicemail database content m See Chapter 5 for information on backing up the provisioning data stored in the VCX Authentication and Directory server database m See the IP Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for information on backing up voicemail and other IP Messaging data wm Also regularly back up the VCX configuration data on each VCX server See Chapter 4 In addition BEFORE you upgrade your VCX system to a new release perform these backups again If the upgrade fails and you must downgrade you can restore data from these backups as part of the downgrade procedure 218 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y Preliminary Steps Prior to performing any upgrade you should check the following Check the configuration type of the system you are going to upgrade The upgrade procedure you need to perform depends on your VCX system configuration see VCX Software Components and VCX Hardware Configurations You can use the vex showconfigtype command to verify the configuration type Your configuration determines the correct tar file or files required for the upgrade You must stop database replication before starting the upgrade process On replicated systems check replication status to make sure it is normal To check repl
224. m can be deployed across enterprises in any topology from single site campuses to highly distributed organizations with thousands of branches VCX servers run the VCX operating system and host software components such as the Call Processor VCX applications such as IP Messaging and configuration databases SIP enabled endpoints include VCX telephones and gateways which provide user access to the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN VCX system components can be installed in different configurations according to the features required and the number of subscribers that must be supported The system configuration determines the tasks you must perform to enable communication between components VCX Software Components describes the VCX software components VCX Hardware Configurations describes the two basic VCX configurations single site and multi site systems VCX Maintenance Tasks describes the general tasks required to add users assign phones to users and enable communication between devices on your VCX system VCX Software Components This section describes the individual software components in a VCX System A VCX system includes the following software services m Call Processor Performs call processing functions and generates Call Detail Records CDRs m Authentication and Directory Service Performs the following tasks a Authentication VCX Software Components 17 Authentication for example
225. m the default G 711u codec to the G729a codec you must run the change codec utility as described in How to Change Your Codec m f you want to convert custom recorded prompts and saved voice mail from on codec to another you must run the codec data convert utility as described in Converting Prompts and Messages to a Different Codec When you change the codec used on an IP Messaging system you must make the change on both the primary IP Messaging server and the secondary IP Messaging server CAUTION If you configure an existing IP Messaging system to use a different codec all custom prompts and voice mail messages saved in the previous codec format will be lost To avoid this loss run the codec data convert utility before running the change codec utility See Converting Prompts and Messages to a Different Codec The following example assumes the IP Messaging system is operating with the default codec G 711u and the default set of language prompts US English The steps in the example install the G 729a codec and enable UK English language prompts Log in to the primary IP Messaging server using the root account Enter the following command to switch to the IP Messaging installation directory cd opt installtemp Note that if you have upgraded your IP Messaging system new files are located in opt installtemp upgrade 7 1 yc Enter the following command to install the G 729a codec vex install IPMSG UK EN G729a SP
226. mary Media Gateway 10 230 64 15 Secondary Media Gateway 10 230 67 15 Enable Call Records Service Y Do you wish to change any of the values shown N Press the Enter or Return key to accept the default answer N To change any of the information enter Y 114 CHAPTER 7 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued This section allows you to change the password for each VCX system account Press Enter to accept the current password Root account password A blank entry means no change Password Password confirm Oracle account password A blank entry means no change Password Password confirm Tomcat account password A blank entry means no change Password Password confirm Cworks account password A blank entry means no change Password Password confirm This cworks password is used to log into the local cworks account on this server You may be prompted later in this script for another cworks password which is used for authentication between replicating databases The local cworks account password and the cworks database authentication password do not have to match VCX account password A blank entry means no change Password Password confirm App account password A blank entry means no change Password Password confirm Do you wish to change any of the System parameters N Sample VCX Server Reconfiguration 115 Sample VCX Reconfiguration Scr
227. mbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Upgrading the Secondary IP Telephony Server 1 Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 269 Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc Stop IP Messaging When the primary IP Messaging reboots IP Messaging restarts and must be stopped before you can upgrade the secondary IP Messaging server However you should ensure IP Messaging is fully active before stopping it To check IP Messaging status enter the following commands su app cd opt 3com VCX UMS vcx scripts init d vexums status If the returned status is running stop IP Messaging by entering the following commands exit cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the secondary IP Telephony server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the secondary IP Telephony server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx softswitch 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are HSSRS SSeS Re See ees Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available 2 Obtain
228. n A low battery condition is reached when the battery charge reaches a defined threshold percentage Low Battery Threshold 25 214 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 Enter the UPS battery threshold charge The default is 2596 The range is from 25 to 75 8 The upgrade script gives you the opportunity to change your UPS monitoring configuration Do you wish to change any of the UPS Monitoring parameters N Enter n or press Enter to accept the current configuration Enter y if you want to change one or more parameter values UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 X TO V7 1 Y This appendix describes the procedures required to upgrade a system running VCX server software version 7 1 x to VCX server software version 7A This appendix includes the following topics m Verifying Software Versions m Overview of a 7 1 x to 7 1 y Upgrade wm Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers m Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers wm Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices m Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices During a VCX system upgrade or downgrade users cannot make calls within the system However users may be able to make emergency calls or make calls to and receive calls from destinations outside of the VCX system that is the PSTN This capability depends on the availability configuration and capacity of the media gateway or gateways
229. n first on the primary server and then on the secondary server Log in as root and enter this command vex switchversion manual 7 x Example vex switchversion manual 7 0 0c The vex switchversion command m Stops VCX services m Changes a link to point to the requested VCX version m Issues a warning that databases must be restored CAUTION Do not reboot the system or restart VCX services until databases have been restored The VCX 7 0 version has been selected but the databases still contain 7 1 versioned data This combination will not operate successfully Update the pointer to the configuration file using this command SetConfigFile opt 3com VCX conf VCXConfiguration xml Downgrading from 7 1 to 7 0 295 Stop Database Replication If the server is running IP Telephony and IP Messaging server software or IP Telephony server software you must stop database replication CAUTION If the server is running IP Messaging server software do not perform the steps in this section On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop On the Master Site the secondary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata bin dropReplication When the script prompts
230. n 1 enter these commands scp vexdata lt region2 siteID gt backup lt vcx data version tgz cworksG regionl IPaddress gt opt 3com VCX vcxdata db export Log in to Region 1 s VCX Authentication and Directory server as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin restoreVcxdata Enter the Site ID for Region 2 Set up replication on both of the VCX Authentication and Directory servers a b emt oan Verify that Tomcat on Region 1 s Call server is stopped On Region 1 s VCX Authentication and Directory server login as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication Enter Site ID of Region 1 For the Master Definition Site enter the IP address of Region 1 For the Master Site enter the IP address of Region 2 If not already stopped stop Tomcat on the Region 2 Call server On Region 2 s VCX Authentication and Directory server login as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication 96 CHAPTER 6 MANUALLY CONFIGURING MULTI MASTER REPLICATION h Enter Site ID of Region 2 i For the Master Definition Site enter the IP address of Region 2 j Forthe Master Site enter the IP address of Region 1 k On each VCX Authentication and Directory server run checkReplication to verify replication is normal Log in as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin checkReplication m Restart Tomcat on each region s Call
231. n 107 Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued Configuring Hostname Enter system hostname test three In this sample script the host name is being changed from test one to test three Configuring IP Interface eth0 IP Address 10 230 64 40 Network Subnet Mask a 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Address 10 230 64 254 In this sample script the IP address of ethO is being changed from 10 230 64 30 to 10 230 64 40 Other parameters remain unchanged Configuring IP Interface ethl Interface State enabled IP Address 10 230 64 41 Network Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Address 10 230 64 254 In this sample script the IP address of eth is being changed from 10 230 64 31 to 10 230 64 41 Other parameters remain unchanged Configuring DNS Servers Enter DNS servers one at a time When done enter 0 0 0 0 to stop Primary DNS Server 10 25 10 31 Secondary DNS Server 10 26 10 31 Tertiary DNS Server 10 27 10 31 In this sample script DNS server IP addresses remain unchanged Configuring DNS Search Path Press Enter to leave the current path unchanged or specify a new search path with spaces separating each entry DNS Search Path yourcompany com In thi
232. n a regional IP Messaging server follow the procedure described in Downgrading a Single Site System 7 1 to 7 0 Downgrading Call Servers To downgrade a pair of Call servers perform these steps first on the primary server and then on the secondary server Log in as root and switch the VCX version using this command vex switchversion manual 7 x Example vex switchversion manual 7 0 0c The vex switchversion command m Stops VCX services m Changes a link to point to the requested VCX version m Issues a warning that databases must be restored CAUTION Do not reboot the system or restart VCX services until databases have been restored The VCX 7 0 version has been selected but the databases still contain 7 1 versioned data This combination will not operate successfully Update the pointer to the configuration file using this command SetConfigFile opt 3com VCX conf VCXConfiguration xml Downgrading from 7 1 to 7 0 299 3 Switch operating system version p p vy SU The upgrade from 7 0 to 7 1 may or may not have required the installation of a new VCX operating system version This step describes how to determine if a new operating system version was installed and if so how to revert to the previous version The examples in this step use the assumption that upgrading from version 7 0 to 7 1 changed the operating system version from 4 2 1 to 5 1 3 a Login as root b To determine which operating system versions a
233. n script Perform the following steps on the primary and secondary servers a Login as root b Enter the following commands modfw p oracle allow IP address of ethO for the other server modfw p oracle allow IP address of ethl for the other server c Stop the VCX Authentication and Directory server cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop d Stop the Tomcat application S70tomcat stop Remember to perform these steps on each server primary and secondary On the primary server log in as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication The script starts to run Enter the requested information 92 CHAPTER 6 MANUALLY CONFIGURING MULTI MASTER REPLICATION 10 The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id appears Enter the site ID of the office you are logged into The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Since there are only 2 servers in this configuration enter 1 Typically the primary server is the Master Definition Site and the secondary server is the Master Site Enter 1 for the total number of Master Sites in configuration The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP Address of the secondary regional server which is the Master Site The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP Address of the primary server Master Def
234. n the current location and then in the opt 3com VCX backup directory The optional arguments include help Displays information on command usage a fullauto Specifies that the command should run in automatic mode In this mode command execution does not provide any interactive prompts or queries a exclude os Restores all VCX configuration files except the VCX operating system configuration files nobackup Specifies that command execution will not create a backup of the current VCX configuration before restoring the specified backup file For backup filename enter the name of the backup file you want to restore See About the Backup File for a description of backup filenames When the restore operation completes all backed up configuration files are restored to their proper locations During a typical restore operation command output indicates VCX services are being stopped Services will not restart automatically when the restore completes because additional steps for example database restoration are required Backup and Restore Operation Logs 77 Note that for security reasons the VCX firewall is not stopped Furthermore the Common Agent stops only briefly while its own restore is done For EMS based operations this minimizes the time during which remote manageability is unavailable Backup and Restore Operation Logs Each execution of the vex config backup and vex config restore
235. n the primary IP Telephony server and then on the secondary IP Telephony server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Ensure that database replication has no errors see Preliminary Steps and then drop replication on the primary IP Telephony server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication The drop replication script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for this system For single site systems the site ID is identical for both the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press Enter to accept the default C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of ethO on the primary VCX server d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address of ethO on the secondary VCX server 180 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 e TheDo you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes Enter the follo
236. nal office As noted in Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices multi site VCX systems can be categorized by the method used to implement messaging global messaging local messaging or Global Voicemail Integration The procedures in this section are based on a multi site VCX system that includes two regions Region 1 and Region 2 For this example system the branches in Region 1 use local messaging and the branches in Region 2 use global messaging m Abranch that implements local messaging runs IP Telephony and IP Messaging server software Because this type of branch office includes IP Messaging services you can enable Global Voicemail Integration on the branch m Abranch that implements global messaging runs IP Telephony server software The IP Messaging server software running on a regional server provides messaging services for the branch Because this type of branch office receives its IP Messaging services from a regional IP Messaging server you cannot enable Global Voicemail Integration on the branch In this case you must enable Global Voicemail Integration on the regional server All upgrade commands are executed locally at the console CAUTION When upgrading a multi site VCX system upgrade the regional servers before upgrading the branch servers If you upgrade the branch servers first the database schema on the branches may not match the schema version on the region causing database replication failur
237. ncing UPS Monitoring and Global Voicemail Integration prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Stop the Authentication and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the secondary VCX server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the secondary VCX server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx all 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are zoe Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available Switch to the new software version by entering the followin
238. nd 1 Master Site The Secondary im Regional office is replicated to the Master Definition Site Primary Regional office and vice versa In this cluster there are 4 Master Sites Each branch office is replicated to Master Site 1 Secondary Regional office To list all of the VCX data schemas associated with the server you are logged on to 1 Login on the office you want to verify the number of associated offices for as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin listVcxdata The script lists all of the VCX data schemas found 61REG1CHICAGO Deleting Replication Errors 99 BRANCH1StLOUIS BRANCH2MADISON VCXDATA Schema Count 3 Deleting Replication Errors This section provides details on how to use the VCX replication error deletion script Replication errors occasionally need to be deleted for instance before you perform an upgrade To delete replication errors log onto the server hosting the VCX Authentication and Directory server as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin deleteReplicationErrors 100 CHAPTER 6 MANUALLY CONFIGURING MULTI MASTER REPLICATION RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER This chapter describes how to reconfigure a VCX server using the vcx reconfigure command This chapter includes the following topics m Reconfiguration Overview m Sample VCX Server Reconfiguration 102 CHAPTER 7 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Reconfiguration Overview Reconf
239. ndary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop 6 Obtain a copy of the vex a11 7 1 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary VCX server and on the secondary VCX server The variable x indicates the version of VCX software for example vex a11 7 1 3c tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number Next execute the following steps in the order listed m Upgrade the primary VCX server See Upgrading the Primary VCX Server Upgrading the Primary VCX Server 1 Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers 173 wm Upgrade the secondary VCX server See Upgrading the Secondary VCX Server m Setup database replication on the primary VCX server See Set Up Database Replication Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the primary VCX server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the primary VCX server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx all 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are BsceesesmE Eom Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is n
240. nfig restore command includes a parameter exclude os that excludes the operating system information from a restore operation If you select this option the restore operation generates a warning if the system s current IP configuration does not match the configuration contained in the backup file An IP mismatch will very likely result in some or all applications not working properly because IP information is also stored within component configuration files License keys The configuration backup file includes the active VCX license key file A restore operation reinstalls the license key file if the system s machine identifier matches the machine identifier in the backup file If the machine identifiers do not match the restore operation will not attempt to reinstall the license key and will generate a warning if no current license key is found This case typically occurs if the backup file is restored to different hardware as part of a recovery operation in which case a new license key will be required CAUTION VCX configuration backup files may contain sensitive information and should be stored in a manner that ensures access only by authorized individuals Note the following considerations when backing up and restoring a VCX configuration Database content provisioning and voicemail databases is not considered part of the VCX configuration and is not included in a backup file To completely backup your VCX system you should ba
241. nfiguring the Call Processor Through the Enterprise Management Suite EMS EMS is an optional management tool that offers a simple method to configure the Call Processor EMS uses an SNMP interface that allows for easy viewing and management of all of the Call Processor configurable parameters See the 3Com Enterprise Management Suite User Guide for basic EMS information and see the Enterprise Management Suite User Guide for VCX V7000 Components for VCX specific information Using the vcx reconfigure command The vex reconfigure command is run from a console attached to the VCX server This command allows you to modify the configuration of an existing VCX system This command is described in Chapter 7 p Configuring Trusted Endpoints 143 m Through the remoteCli Command Line Interpreter The remoteCli interface is run from a console attached to the VCX server This command allows you to configure trusted end points described in this chapter and other VCX components see Call Processor Command Line Interface Commands The Call Processor XML file nmdb xml should not be modified manually since the Call Processor writes freely to the file at run time and requires the Call Processor to be stopped in order to be edited Use either CLI commands or the Enterprise Management Suite to configure the Call Processor instead Configuring Trusted Endpoints Adding Trusted Endpoints This section provides information on how to add
242. nfirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are SEEDS Ee cue cue Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 yc is now available Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 y IP Telephony services 228 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y Upgrading the Primary IP Messaging Server 3 After the system has completed the restart process verify that the 1 upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc Stop the Authentication and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the primary IP Messaging server To start
243. ng server enter y If not enter n 6 The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Upgrading the Regional Call Records Server Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 205 Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you do have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts After completing the Adhoc Conferencing and UPS Monitoring prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the System starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example
244. ng the SIP phone downloader using the root or vcx account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX devdnldsvr vcx scripts init d S90devdnldsvr stop To restart the SIP phone downloader application Log in to the server hosting the SIP phone downloader using the root or vcx account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX devdnldsvr vcx scripts init d S90devdnldsvr restart 62 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS Managing the IP Messaging Service Verifying IP Messaging Service Status 1 Starting the IP Messaging Service 1 Stopping the IP Messaging Service 1 Restarting the IP Messaging Service 1 The IP Messaging service provides voicemail and unified messaging services to users To verify the status of the IP Messaging service Log in to the server hosting the IP Messaging service using the app account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums status To start the IP Messaging service Log in to the server hosting the IP Messaging service using the app account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums start To stop the IP Messaging service Log in to the server hosting the IP Messaging service using the app account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop To restart the IP Messaging service Log in to the server hosting the IP Messaging service using the app account
245. ng the vcx backup query command 74 using the vcx config backup command 72 using the vcx config restore command 75 VCX servers and constituent services 18 configuration options 18 multi site options 19 single site options 19 VCX services and related VCX servers 18 described 16 344 CHAPTER INDEX determining location IP address 56 VCX system filename guidelines 24 hardware components configuration options 19 maintenance tasks 21 overview 16 software components 16 configuration options 17 vcx assemble command 166 216 vox config backup command overview 70 vox config network command 47 vox config restore command overview 70 vcx config services command 56 vex install command to install a codec 65 vcx licenseinstall command 257 vox licensequery command 258 vex listversions command 166 216 vcx os query command 297 309 vcx os switch command 297 309 vocreconfigure command 63 102 vocshowconfigtype command 168 218 verifying number of schemas in a region 97 replication at a branch office 96 Service operation 51 SNMP support 60 viewing Accounting service details 36 Accounting service group 30 Accounting service group details 30 CDRs 40 Super CDRs 41 voicemail global integration 20 X XML files as input for user MAC command 156 157
246. ng the vex reconfigure command on each server see Chapter 7 Follow the procedures in this section to upgrade a multi site VCX system from version 7 1 x to 7 1 y The components in a multi site VCX system can be set up in many possible configurations The procedures in this AN Multi Site VCX System Upgrade Order Upgrading the Regional Authentication and Directory Servers Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 235 section are based on a multi site VCX system that includes two regions Region 1 and Region 2 with multiple branch offices in each region All upgrade commands are executed locally at the console When upgrading a region to region office configuration you must drop replication between the Authentication and Directory server in each region CAUTION When upgrading a multi site VCX system upgrade the regional servers before upgrading the branch servers If you upgrade the branch servers first the database schema on the branches may not match the schema version on the region causing database replication failure When upgrading a multi site VCX system configuration upgrade the components in the following order If you plan to enable Global Voicemail Integration install IP Messaging software on a pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers and then set up the GVCS through the IP Messaging administrator configuration interface before enabling global voicemail integration on regional and branch offic
247. ng the vex reconfigure script See Chapter 7 CAUTION Do not use operating system commands or utilities to change these passwords The vex reconfigure script changes the password where necessary in VCX scripts and configurations Operating system commands and utilities do not VCX File and Directory Name Guidelines VCX systems adhere to file naming conventions based on Linux and UNIX C shell usage Files may be created on other platforms such as Microsoft Windows and then transferred to a VCX system A valid Windows file or directory name may not be compatible with VCX Linux conventions To ensure that the names of any transferred files are compatible with the VCX conventions please use the following guidelines m File and directory names composed of upper and lower case letters numbers hyphens and underscores are generally valid but do not begin a name with a hyphen m File or directory names can range from 1 to 255 characters m File or directory names must not begin with a hyphen or a period m Do not use any of the characters listed in Table 6 in a file or directory name Table 6 Characters to Avoid in File and Directory Names Character Description Forward slash Backward slash Single quotation mark Double quotation mark Comma Asterisk Question mark and Left and right square brackets and Left and right braces Tilde VCX File and Directory Name Guidelines 25 Table
248. ngle site VCX systems can have either two servers or four servers m In a two server configuration each server runs IP Telephony server software and IP Messaging server software 220 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y m Ina four server configuration one pair of servers runs IP Telephony server software the second pair of servers runs IP Messaging server software Follow the procedure in this section to upgrade the two server configuration at a single site from one version of VCX software 7 1 x to a later version 7 1 y Before you begin the upgrade procedures on the primary VCX server and on the secondary VCX server perform these steps Log in as root on the primary VCX server and on the secondary VCX server Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary VCX server and then on the secondary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Ensure that database replication has no errors see Preliminary Steps and then drop replication on the primary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication The drop replication script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id prompt appears Enter site ID configured for this system For single site systems the site ID is identical for both the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server b The Enter the Number o
249. nition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of ethO on the primary VCX server The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address of ethO on the secondary VCX server The po you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes During script execution messages appear describing the replication setup Messages also appear stating that firewall setup should allow communication between the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server These messages are a reminder firewall setup was performed during VCX software installation The Have you executed the ABOVE mentioned VCX FIREWALL steps y n prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes When the replication is complete Multi Master Replication Status is reported as NORMAL Do not continue to the next step until the replication is complete Note that replication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete You can check the replication by entering the following command checkReplication 3 When the replication is complete enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices 189 4 Start the Authentication and Directory service on the primary IP Tel
250. nning on a VCX call processing server Similarly the script uses the term Call Records Server In a single site VCX system this term refers to the Call Records service running on a VCX call processing server In a multi site VCX system this term refers to the Call Records service running on a separate Call Records Server 30 CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING THE CALL RECORDS SERVICE Adding an Accounting Group Viewing Configured Group Details 1 To add an accounting group Log on to the VCX server hosting the Call Records service as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX bssxml bin config sh A menu of configuration options appears followed by the SELECT OPERATION prompt At the prompt enter 101 The Enter Unique Group Name prompt appears Enter a descriptive name for your group The new group is created and enabled automatically To list the existing accounting enter 104 at the SELECT OPERATION prompt Use this function to list the Accounting services associated with a specific group This function also shows whether or not a group is enabled and how often it collects CDRs from the Accounting services To view group details Log on to the VCX server hosting the Call Records service as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX bssxml bin config sh A menu of configuration options appears followed by the SELECT OPERATION prompt At the prompt enter 105 The Enter Group Name to View De
251. nstalled versions of VCX software This command is described in the upgrade and downgrade appendixes Table 18 lists commands you can use to manage VCX software licenses For VCX versions 7 0 and higher you must obtain and activate a license key for each VCX server before you can install new server software or upgrade from VCX software version 6 0 or earlier See License Keys for more information Table 18 VCX Licensing Commands Command Description vox show machineid Displays the machine ID of the computer A machine ID uniquely associates one server to a VCX software license key See License Keys 332 APPENDIX E VCX COMMANDS Table 18 VCX Licensing Commands continued Command Description vcx licensequery Displays information about the currently installed VCX software license for example serial number customer name and expiration date Requires one of the following arguments help Displays command syntax information validate Indicates whether the license key has been successfully validated machine identifier Displays the machine id system release version Displays the currently running version of VCX software issuer name Displays the name of the company issuing the license in this case 3Com Corporation customer name Displays the name of the customer customer address Displays customer address information account number Displays the custome
252. ntenance Tasks 21 The version 7 1 upgrade procedure allows you to enable Global Voicemail Integration on servers running IP Messaging software However you must install IP Messaging software on a GVCS and then set up the GVCS through the IP Messaging administrator configuration interface before enabling Global Voicemail Integration on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers Refer to the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for more information and for configuration options With VCX software version 7 0 and higher you can set up IP Messaging in a client server configuration An IP Messaging server can support up to 20 IP Messaging clients One client can be dedicated to non voice applications such as Web provisioning e mail synchronization and logging The remaining clients can be dedicated to voice functions This type of setup diverts the stream of voice traffic and improves the IP Messaging server performance Clients should be located on the subnet with both management servers or have a minimum of 200 Mbps IP backbone on a dual subnet network configuration See the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for details VCX Maintenance Tasks This section describes the maintenance tasks you may need to periodically perform to for example backup a database add an Accounting service group to the Call Records service or upgrade your VCX system software This section assumes th
253. ntication and Directory server in Region 2 d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 If there are more than one Master Sites this question repeats until the number of master sites specified in step b is reached e The Do you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes 5 10 Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 239 Enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Obtain a copy of the vex dataserver 7 1 yc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the Authentication and Directory server The variable y indicates the version of VCX software for example vex dataserver 7 1 3c tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number Enter these commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx dataserver 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 y install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Installation Completed Successfully
254. ntication and Directory service using the cworks account Depending on your VCX configuration the Authentication and Directory service runs on either the IP Telephony server the IP Telephony and IP Messaging server or the Authentication and Directory standalone server Restoring the VCX Authentication and Directory Server Database Backing Up and Restoring the Authentication and Directory Server Database 81 Enter the following commands to change the directory and stop the VCX Authentication and Directory service cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Enter the following commands to start the VCX Authentication and Directory server database backup utility cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin backupVexdata The utility prompts you to verify that Tomcat and the VCX Authentication and Directory server services are stopped Enter y to confirm the services are stopped The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id prompt appears Enter the site ID of the Master Definition site A backup file named vcxdata site ID backup version number gt tgz is generated and saved in the opt 3com VCX vcxdata db export directory Unless you plan to use this backup file immediately to restore the database on another server you should copy the file to an archive server Restart the Tomcat and the VCX Authentication and Directory services a Login to the server hosting Tomcat using the tomcat account and enter the following
255. o each server as root and executing the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat start Be sure to run the admincfg script on each VCX server in the multi site system that runs the Call Processing service IP Telephony and Messaging Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 289 server IP Telephony server and Call Processing server See Post Upgrade Requirements 290 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE This appendix describes the procedures you can perform to downgrade the VCX software running on your system to a previously installed version This chapter includes the following topics m Verifying Software Versions Downgrading from 7 1 to 7 0 a Downgrading from 7 1 y to 7 1 x a Downgrading from 7 0 to 6 0 During a VCX system upgrade or downgrade users cannot make calls within the system However users may be able to make emergency calls or make calls to and receive calls from destinations outside of the VCX system that is the PSTN This capability depends on the availability configuration and capacity of the media gateway or gateways set up in the VCX system See the VCX Installation Guide for information on configuring a fail over call route point Also refer to your gateway documentation 292 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE Verifying Software Versions This section describes how to verify the soft
256. o have a UPS installed and enter y and see Configuring UPS Monitoring for information on the subsequent UPS configuration prompts 5 After completing the Adhoc Conferencing and UPS Monitoring prompts the server reboots When the reboot process has been completed the System starts VCX 7 1 x services 6 After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few 186 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 Upgrading the Secondary IP Messaging Server 1 minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Stop the Authentication and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the secondary IP Messaging server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the secondary IP Messaging server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx ipmsg 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see
257. odify or delete accounts 3Com Corporation recommends that a CSV file contain no more than 5000 transactions While this is not a hard limit exceeding 5000 transactions may cause performance issues 162 CHAPTER 10 MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Use the following syntax to specify a CSV file as input to the user MAC command user MAC csv InputFileName csv non stop The CSV file must have the following column headings in the following order to be compatible with the user MAc command line script UNAME PHONE PASSWORD TITLE FIRST MIDDLE LAST EMAIL STREET1 STREET2 CITY STATE COUNTRY ZIP SITE REMOTE PPROFILE The following CSV file adds two user accounts note that omitted field values are represented by successive commas as for the MIDDLE parameter in the second entry UNAME PHONE PASSWORD TITLE FIRST MIDDLE LAST EMAIL STREET1 STREET2 CITY STATE COUNTRY ZIP SITE REMOTE PPROFILE jjohnson 1000 uhf672f Ms Jane Sara Johnson jjohnQabc com 10 Oak St Apt 3 Boston MA USA 16003 reg1 10 231 22 30 local mlopez 2000 kjhgs876jj Mr Miguel Lopez mlopezGbcd com 231 E Main St Denver CO USA 30610 reg2 10 231 22 40 global Files and Directories Table 15 lists the files and their locations associated with the userz MAC command line script Table 15 File Locations Directory File Description opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin user MAC Runs the command line user account man
258. office server The variable y indicates the version of VCX software for example 248 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y vex all 7 1 3c tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number 3 To start the upgrade process enter the following commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx all 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are mcuguecmeBeemecL Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 yc is now available Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 y services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer
259. oftware upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary Call server and on the secondary Call server 3 Start the upgrade process on the primary Call server by entering the following commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcox callserver 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Scene ea a erem Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available 4 Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable Adhoc Conferencing and UPS Monitoring 5 The Adhoc Conferencing prompt appears In order to support ad hoc conferences with more than 3 participants the Adhoc Conference Service is used This service should be enabled on this server unless another Server dedicated to Adhoc Conferencing will be used instead If available a separate server typically provides greater capacity and may be shared among sites Use the Adhoc service on this server Y N Y If you want this server to act as a multi caller up to 6 callers conferenci
260. ollowing sections must be performed on each server running IP Telephony server software For servers running IP Messaging server software the database maintenance steps are not required Switch VCX Version To switch the VCX version perform the steps in this section on each server in the single site system m Ina two server configuration perform the steps first on the primary server and then on the secondary server m Ina four server configuration perform the steps first on the primary IP Telephony server and then on the secondary IP Telephony server Then perform the steps first on the primary IP Messaging server and then on the secondary IP Messaging server Log in to the server as root user Enter the following command vex switchversion manual 6 x For example to downgrade to VCX version 6 0 2 c enter vcx switchversion manual 6 0 2c 1 Downgrading from 7 0 to 6 0 319 The vex switchversion command m Stops VCX services m Changes the opt 3com VCX link to point to the requested VCX version m Issues a warning that databases must be restored CAUTION Do not reboot the system or restart VCX services until databases have been restored The VCX 6 0 x version has been selected but the databases still contain 7 0 versioned data This combination will not operate successfully If you are downgrading a IP Telephony and IP Messaging server or an IP Telephony server go to the next section Stop VCX Database Replicat
261. on and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the primary IP Messaging server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the primary IP Messaging server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx ipmsg 7 1 xc tar cd upgrade 7 1 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 183 eSeLecesmBeueS USES Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 xc is now available 2 Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable UPS Monitoring and Global Voicemail Integration 3 The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured
262. on in both regions The following steps upgrade the databases in each region set up replication in each region and restart the Authentication and Directory server in each region You should still be logged in as root in each region On the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 upgrade the Region 2 database by entering the following commands su cworks cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin upgradeVcxdata The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id prompt appears 2 Enter the Site ID for Region 2 3 On the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 upgrade the Region 1 database by entering the following commands su cworks cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin upgradeVcxdata The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter the Site ID for Region 1 Set up database replication on Region 1 by entering the following commands you should still be logged in to the Authentication and Directory server as cworks cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for this system b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE prompt appears Enter the number of Master sites To determine the number of Master Sites associated with this office use the istVcxdata command See 280 APPENDIX C UPGRADING
263. on is complete and status is NORMAL on Region 1 and Region 2 start the Authentication and Directory servers in each region by entering the following commands while logged in as root cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start Start the Tomcat process on the primary Call server and the secondary Call server in each region by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat start This section describes how to upgrade regional IP Messaging servers These servers may provide messaging services for users using one of the following methods m Global Voicemail Integration In version 7 1 multi site VCX systems can be configured to use Global Voicemail Integration This service is Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 243 provided by a pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS to enable global voicemail integration on an entire IP Messaging system See Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices and the IP Messaging documentation m Local messaging Messaging services are provided to remote users by the regional office a Global messaging Messaging services are provided to users locally by the either a regional office or a branch office For local and global messaging you need to perform the steps in this section on a console attached to each IP Messaging server in all regions Region 1 and Region 2 in this example For Global Voicemail Integration the
264. on on managing phone extensions In versions of VCX software prior to VCX v7 1 phone attributes such as dial plan ring tones voicemail number are configured for each phone extension VCX v7 1 software includes a new feature called a phone profile A phone profile includes a set of attributes that are common to all phone extensions that are assigned to the profile Configuration Upgrade Options Overview of a 7 0 to 7 1 Upgrade 169 The VCX v7 1 upgrade procedure creates one or more phone profiles based on data configured for phones in the VCX v7 0 system and assigns each phone to the appropriate phone profile However the VCX administrator should be aware of upgrade implications on the following phone configuration settings Registration Interval This setting specifies how often a registration message is sent to the VCX server to see if it is active and to check for updates to the phone configuration The VCX v7 1 upgrade procedure resets this parameter to the default value 3600 seconds one hour Date Time Display Format Local Time Zone various Ring Tones Call Fallback The values for these settings are retained for individual phones However these same settings are also configured in the phone profile to which a phone is assigned If the phone profile is modified and reapplied the profile values will override the phone settings Refer to the VCX Administration Guide for more information on phone profiles and confi
265. on prompts will appear a If you enter Y this system will be configured as the primary IP Messaging server and you will be asked to identify the IP Messaging clients associated with this server The following prompts appear A list of each of the IPMSG client systems IP addresses and hostnames is required Enter a blank input to indicate that all clients have been entered IP address of IPMSG client 1 Client IP Address f Enter the IP address of the first IP Messaging client system The following prompts appear Hostname of IPMSG client 1 Client Hostname g Enter the hostname of the first IP Messaging client system You can identify 20 IP Messaging client systems The client configuration prompts appear until you reach the maximum 20 entries or until you press Enter without entering a IP address When you finish identifying IP Messaging client systems the following prompt appears Do you wish to change any of the IP Messaging Service parameters N Upgrading the Regional Call Servers Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 283 h Press Enter to accept the default answer N If you enter Y the script presents each of the items that you entered and allows you to accept the value or change it The system reboots After the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 x IP Messaging services i After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by
266. one options as the vex config network tool When using the vex con ig network tool both the daylight saving and time zone preferences are configured at the same time To modify the daylight saving or timezone configuration for your VCX system Log in into the server hosting the VCX IP Telephony Server using the root account Enter the following command to start the configuration tool vex config network 48 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS 3 Enter the following command setup timezone Follow the prompts to change the time zone setting 5 Enter the following commands save exit The configuration tool applies the changes Managing Log and CDR Files Tomcat and IP Messaging Log File Maintenance VCX software writes data to various log files and call information to Call Detail Records CDRs and optionally Quality of Service Detail Records QDRs IP Messaging software also writes call information to CDRs As part of your routine VCX server maintenance schedule you should examine the directories containing these files and purge older files to maintain sufficient disk space You should monitor the following applications and services m Tomcat and IP Messaging log files m Accounting service for CDR and QDR collection Files in the tomcat directory opt 3com VCX tomcat logs you should monitor include m catalina out files for example catalina 2006 07 10 log wm localhost access log files for example
267. ore minutes and then repeat the command Do not continue until you see the NORMAL message When replication is complete go to the next section Switch Operating System Versions and Reboot Switch Operating System Versions and Reboot The VCX system supports two operating system images If the upgrade required installation of a new VCX operating system version then the downgrade must revert to the previous installation The procedure in this section describes how to determine if a new operating system version was installed and if so how to revert to the previous version The examples in this procedure use the assumption that upgrading from version 6 0 to 7 0 changed the operating system version from 3 4 0 to 4 2 1 Log in as root Enter the following command to determine which operating system versions are available vex os query 322 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE Downgrading a Multi Site System The output from this command is similar to the following OS Version Partition Label Status A 3 4 0 dev hda2 A B 4 2 1 dev hda3 B active The operating system versions that you see may vary from the example shown Also the order of the A and B versions may be reversed depending on the upgrade history of the system Select the operating system version in this example 3 4 0 to use after rebooting by entering the following command vex os switch 3 4 0 Execute this command on the primary server and t
268. ory Service a Managing the SIP Phone Downloader a Managing the IP Messaging Service a Managing Authorized SNMP Station Access m Changing Codecs 46 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS Managing the Tomcat Web Server Verifying Tomcat Server Status Stopping the Tomcat Server Starting the Tomcat Server 1 2 1 The Tomcat web server allows administrators and users to access web based VCX management and provisioning interfaces The Tomcat server can run on an IP Telephony and IP Messaging Server an IP Telephony Server an IP Messaging Server or a Call Server To verify that the Tomcat server is running Log in into the server hosting the Tomcat server using the root account Enter the following command ps aux grep tomcat If Tomcat is running the operating system returns output similar to the following tomcat 11619 0 0 3 7 496564 95892 S Jun05 5 37 opt 3com VCX j2sdk bin java Xms32m Xmx256m Djava util logging manager org apache juli ClassLoaderLogManager Djava endorsed dirs opt 3com VCX tomcat common endorsed classpath opt 3com VCX tomcat bin bootstrap jar opt 3com VCX tomcat bin commons log root 17471 0 0 0 0 3888 600 pts 0 S 06 57 0 00 grep tomcat You may need to stop and start the Tomcat web server for example when performing a VCX software upgrade To stop the Tomcat process Log in into the server hosting the Tomcat server using the tomcat account Enter the fo
269. osting the Accounting service 34 CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING THE CALL RECORDS SERVICE p Editing Accounting Service Information in a Group a Atthe Enter Password for Username prompt enter cworks An asterisk appears at the Password prompts Enter and re enter the password for the user default username is cworks The cworks in the bracket after the prompt is not the default password You must enter the correct password for the user If nothing except the Enter key is given an empty password is accepted which is probably not the correct password for that user cworks on the Accounting service b Atthe Retype Password for Username prompt enter cworks The new Accounting service is added to the group You will see a SUCCESS message once it has been added The Accounting service is added to the Call Records service group Press Enter to return to the main menu You can use this feature if you need to update Accounting service information To edit Accounting service information Log on to the VCX server hosting the Call Records service as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX bssxml bin config sh A menu of configuration options appears followed by the SELECT OPERATION prompt 2 Atthe prompt enter 202 3 The screen displays the number of configured Accounting services Continue to press Enter to view the Accounting services clustered in their group until you reach the Enter Source Name to Update
270. oteCli prompt gt enter 148 CHAPTER 9 CONFIGURING THE CALL PROCESSOR config authc use false config auths pri 2 IpAddress lt IP address of secondary authentication server gt config auths pri 2 LocalIpAddress lt IP address of call processor gt config authc use true 5 The interface lists the IP address of the new Authentication and Directory Server 6 To exit the remoteCLI interface enter exit 10 MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This chapter describes how to add modify and delete user accounts using the user mac command This chapter includes the following topics Command Overview Using Single User Mode Using Batch Mode Files and Directories 150 CHAPTER 10 MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Overview The user MAC command enables the automated creation of VCX user accounts and phone extension assignments You can run the command in two modes m Single user mode In this mode the command adds one user account at a time based on the user attributes specified as command parameters You can also use this mode to modify or delete a single user account m Batch mode In this mode the command adds multiple user accounts based on the user attributes specified in either a CSV or XML input file You can also use this mode to modify or delete a multiple user accounts using an XML file but not a CSV file as input Using either sin
271. ow available Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable Adhoc Conferencing UPS Monitoring and Global Voicemail Integration The Adhoc Conferencing prompt appears In order to support ad hoc conferences with more than 3 participants the Adhoc Conference Service is used This service should be enabled on this server unless another Server dedicated to Adhoc Conferencing will be used instead If available a separate server typically provides greater capacity and may be shared among sites Use the Adhoc service on this server Y N Y If you want this server to act as a multi caller up to 6 callers conferencing server enter y If not enter n The UPS Monitoring prompt appears 174 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not disp
272. ow enter the user mac command in either single user mode or batch mode See the sections in this chapter for a description of each 152 CHAPTER 10 MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS UsING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE mode the required syntax and examples For online help with command syntax enter the following command user MAC verbose help When you execute the user mac command console output indicates the progress of the requested action and provides a summary when finished Using Single User Mode You can use the user mac command in single user mode to add modify or delete one user account at a time In single user mode the user mac command can take the parameters shown in Table 14 Table 14 user MAC Command Parameters Parameter Takes Parameter full name abbreviation Value Mode Type Description help or h No Both None Returns text describing command usage CSV Yes Batch CSV file Indicates command input is a comma separated value CSV file The parameter value specifies the name of the CSV file debug or deb Yes Both integer For internal use delete or del No Single None Deletes the specified user account mod or mo No Single None Modifies the specified user account non stop or no No Batch None Indicates that command process in batch mode should not halt because of processing errors xml Yes Batch XML file Indicates command input is an XML file The parameter value spe
273. pgrade the secondary IP Telephony server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the secondary IP Telephony server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcox softswitch 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Sareces SCIL Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 yc is now available Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 y IP Telephony services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding 230 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y Upgrading the Secondary IP Messaging Server 1 Example Output op
274. ponent and operating operating system configuration data on a system configuration data machine running one or more VCX services into a single file and subsequently restore that configuration using the backup file Back up and restore a VCX Back up provisioning data for example user Chapter 5 provisioning data accounts dial plans and phone extensions stored in the VCX Authentication and Directory service database and subsequently restore that provisioning data using the backup file Configure Multi Master Multi Master Replication MMR is the Chapter 6 Replication process of copying and maintaining database tables in multiple databases that make up a distributed database system Reconfigure a VCX server Modify the networking parameters and Chapter 7 configuration of the services run on a VCX server Manage an Uninterruptible Add UPS support to an existing VCX system Chapter 8 Power Supply UPS and monitor UPS status Reconfigure a VCX call Use the Command Line Interface CLI to add Chapter 9 processor trusted end points to a VCX call processor Manage user accounts Use the Command Line Interface CLI to add Chapter 10 modify and delete user accounts either manually or in batch mode About VCX Passwords 23 Table 4 VCX Maintenance Tasks continued Task Purpose Reference Upgrade VCX system software Upgrade VCX system software to a later Appendix A for version 7 0 to release version 7 1 upgrades Appendix B
275. power supplies In this environment the UPS must power only VCX systems and other equipment not requiring graceful shutdown UPS Configuration Options Adding UPS Support to an Existing VCX System 125 For the current VCX software release 3Com Corporation supports UPS hardware from American Power Conversion APC Corporation For a list of supported APC UPS devices and VCX hardware platforms consult with your 3Com Service Representative or your 3Com Voice Authorized Reseller To install and configure a UPS follow the instructions provided by APC m Foranew VCX system you can set up and enable UPS support during the initial installation of VCX software refer to the VCX Installation Guide m Foran existing VCX system you can set up and enable UPS support using the vcx ups setup command or the vcx reconfigure command You can also use either command to modify an existing UPS configuration a This chapter describes how to add a UPS to an existing VCX system using the vex ups setup command a See Chapter 7 for information on the vex reconfigure command While you can use this command to configure UPS support this command is more appropriate for a large scale reconfiguration where you want to modify networking parameters services or both on the server A UPS functions as an SNMP network device The UPS and a VCX system communicate using the SNMPv1 protocol This also allows network management stations such as EMS to monitor
276. priate IP address for these servers a Regional Office For the Primary Call Processor Server and Secondary Call Processor Server use the IP address assigned to eth1 for each server a Branch Office For the IP Telephony and Messaging Server use the IP address assigned to ethO The Do you want to use Default Accounting Server Source Configuration prompt appears 3Com recommends using the default source configuration which identifies where the CDRs are stored on the Accounting service If you enter n a Atthe Enter Source Path prompt enter the path where you want the CDRs to be stored The default is opt 3com VCX acctxml db export b Atthe Enter Source Username enter cworks An asterisk appears at the Password prompts Enter and re enter the password for the user default username is cworks The cworks in the bracket after the prompt is not the default password You must enter the correct password for the user If nothing except the Enter key is given an empty password is accepted which is probably not the correct password for that user cworks on the Accounting service c Atthe Enter Password for Username prompt enter cworks d Atthe Retype Password for Username prompt enter cworks The new Accounting service is added to the group You will see a SUCCESS message once it has been added m lf youenter y the source path defaults to opt 3com VCX acctxml db export which is where the CDRs are stored on server h
277. provide IP Telephony services m Site ID Once configured the site ID must remain the same m Global versus Local Messaging You cannot change this setting after it has been initially configured m System Speed Dial Master After a server has been configured as the master server for configuring system speed dials it must remain the master Similarly no other server once it has been configured to not be a system speed dial master server can become the master server Sample VCX Server Reconfiguration 103 Sample VCX Server The sample reconfiguration script in this section is based on a two server Reconfiguration configuration The changes made are described in Table 9 Any configuration parameters not listed in Table 9 remain unchanged Table 9 Changes in Server Configuration Parameter Original Value New Value IP Address ethO 10 230 64 30 10 230 64 40 IP Address eth1 10 230 64 31 10 230 64 41 Partner IP Address ethO 10 230 66 30 10 230 67 40 Partner IP Address eth1 10 230 66 31 10 230 67 41 Server Name test one test three Site Description Site One Site Three Partner Server Name test two test four Partner Site ID testtwo testfour 104 CHAPTER 7 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script This utility allows a previously configured VCX system to be reconfigured for example to change its IP address or the IP addresses of other VCX Servers with which it communicate
278. ps 2 through 5 68 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS BACKING UP AND RESTORING A VCX CONFIGURATION This chapter describes how to back up and restore a VCX system configuration using the vex config backup and vex config restore commands This chapter includes the following topics m VCX Configuration Backup and Restore Overview m Backing Up a VCX Configuration m Restoring a VCX Configuration m Backup and Restore Operation Logs 70 CHAPTER 4 BACKING UP AND RESTORING A VCX CONFIGURATION VCX Configuration Backup and Restore Overview VCX Configuration Backup File Contents The VCX configuration backup and restore feature allows you to completely back up all relevant VCX configuration data on a machine running one or more VCX services into a single file and subsequently restore that configuration using the backup file You can perform the backup and restore operations either locally using the vex config backup and vex config restore commands or remotely using EMS This chapter describes the command line option refer to the EMS documentation for the EMS option As described in Chapter 1 a VCX system can include multiple servers running the VCX operating system VCX Services such as IP Messaging and the Call Processor and configuration databases VCX servers can be installed in different physical configurations according to the features required and the number of subscribers that must be supported Because of this di
279. pt appears 84 CHAPTER 5 MANAGING AUTHENTICATION AND DIRECTORY SERVICE DATABASES 8 10 11 Enter the site ID of the Master Definition site The vcxdata site ID backup version number gt tgz back up file located at opt 3com VCX auth db import is restored to the VCX Authentication and Directory server database Enter the following command on the primary VCX Authentication and Directory server to start replication setupReplication The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id prompt appears a Enter the site ID of the Master Definition site The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE prompt appears To determine the number of Master Sites associated with this office use the istVcxdata command See Verifying the Number of VCX Data Schemas in a Region for more information b Enter the number of Master sites The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears c Enter the IP Address of the Master Definition site The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears If the configuration includes more than one Master Site this question repeats until the number of master sites specified in a previous question is reached d Enter the IP Address of each Master Sites Once the replication is complete use the checkReplication command and verify the command returns NORMAL status Restart the Tomcat and the VCX Authentication and Dire
280. r these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop On the Master Site the secondary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin dropReplication When the script prompts you enter the site ID of the Master Site Restore VCX Databases Before upgrading from version 7 1 x to 7 1 y you must have backed up the system databases To restore the database on each server that is running the IP Telephony and Messaging or IP Telephony software configuration see Restoring the VCX Authentication and Directory Server Database VCX systems require database replication between these servers You must restore the database on both servers Restore IP Messaging Databases Before upgrading from version 7 1 x to 7 1 y you must have backed up the IP Messaging databases To restore the database on each server that is running IP Messaging server software see the P Messaging Operations and System Administration Guide VCX systems require mirroring between IP Messaging servers You must restore the database on both servers 308 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE Establish VCX Database Replication On Master Definition Site that is running IP Telephony and IP Messaging server software or IP Telephony server software establish data
281. r account number expiration date Displays the expiration date of the original license key update expiration date Displays the expiration date of the updated license key license capacity Displays the number of supported phones IP Messaging clients and conferencing clients all Displays information for all of the arguments vox licenseinstall Installs a VCX software license key on a host machine See Installing a License Key File Table 19 lists commands you can use to view version information of various VCX software components Table 19 VCX Version Information Commands Command Description vox showversion Displays the currently running version of VCX software See Verifying Software Versions Command Descriptions 333 Table 19 VCX Version Information Commands continued Command Description vcx showphone softwareversion Supports the following arguments a devapp Displays the version of application software running on telephones connected to the system a devboot Displays the version of boot software running on telephones connected to the system If neither argument is specified the command returns both the application software version and the boot software version vcx showcomponents For VCX versions 7 1 and higher when entered with no arguments displays a list of the components and their versions which make up the currently active VCX software
282. r each office such as including the site ID to help you better identify what is being listed when the istVcxdata command is executed Figure 1 shows how the servers are configured and how you would determine how many Master Sites would be in each cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers that replicate to each other 98 CHAPTER 6 MANUALLY CONFIGURING MULTI MASTER REPLICATION Branch offices 1 through 3 replicate to Region 1 primary but since Region 1 primary is the Master Definition Site there are only 3 Master sites in this cluster Branch offices 4 through 6 replicate to Region 1 secondary which is considered a Master Site since it is not the primary regional office This cluster has 4 Master Sites in it If you executed the istVcxdata command on branch 4 no Master Definition Site would be listed just the 4 Master Sites since the Master Definition site is not in the same cluster as that branch Figure 1 Replication Setup between Master Definition Site and Master Sites Region 1 Primary Region 1 Secondary Master Site 1 Fe TImary Master Definition Site Branch 1 Branch 2 Branch 3 Master Site 2 Master Site 3 Master Site 4 Master Site 5 Master Site 6 Master Site 7 l s nr __ In this cluster there is 1 Master Definition Site and 3 Master Sites Each branch office is replicated to the Master Definition Site In this cluster there is 1 Master Definition Site a
283. r every server in a VCX single site or multi site system The key enables the use of the software installed on each VCX type of server CAUTION After installing a VCX server with version 7 0 software you must obtain and install a valid license key file before you switch to the new software If you do not install the file many software processes that are critical to the proper operation of the server cannot start Obtaining a License Key File Each license key in the file is uniquely tied to one server through a machine ID Upgrading a VCX server requires installing the new software then Switching from the old version to the new version You obtain the license Overview of a 6 0 to 7 0 Upgrade 257 key file after installing the new software and install the license key before switching to the new version Once you have installed the new VCX software on a server obtain the machine ID for the server by entering the following command while logged in to the root account vcx showmachineid This command returns a value similar to the following SNAm Fro7 vrJa YKhH H8az db7Q Your 3Com Voice Authorized Reseller will supply the license key that corresponds to the machine ID For the sample machine id shown above the license key filename would be SNAm Fro7 vrJa YKhH H8az db7Q activation key Save the license key file in the opt installtemp directory 3Com strongly recommends that you save copies of your license key files in a separate
284. r or Return key to accept the default answer N and make no further changes If you want to make additional changes enter Y Configuring additional parameters for Common Agent The Trap Destination specifies the IP address to be used as a destination when this system sends SNMP traps Trap Destination 10 230 64 70 Press the Enter or Return key to accept the IP address of the existing Network Management Station or enter a new IP address In this sample script the address remains unchanged The Trap Community String provides a community string to be used when sending SNMP traps to the trap destination Trap Community String public Press the Enter or Return key to accept the existing trap community string or enter a new string 120 CHAPTER 7 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued In some cases it may be desirable for SNMP Traps to be sent to multiple destinations Additional Trap Destinations can be entered here Enter a blank input to indicate that all destinations have been entered IP Address of the first additional trap destination for this system Trap Destination 10 230 62 31 Community String for the first additional trap destination Trap Community String public IP Address of the second additional trap destination for this system Trap Destination The Write Community String specifies the community string to be used by a management station when sending wri
285. r sites To determine the number of Master Sites associated with this office use the istVcxdata command See Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP 242 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y Upgrading the Regional IP Messaging Servers Telephony and Messaging Server for more information In this example there is one Master site Region 1 C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on this server the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 If there are more than one Master Sites this question repeats until the number of master sites specified in step b is reached e The Do you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes When the replication is complete Multi Master Replication Status is reported as NORMAL Do not continue to the next step on this server until the replication is complete Note that replication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete f You can check the replication by entering the following command checkReplication Once replicati
286. rcase to designate this server as the master monitormultipleups Y Adding UPS Support to an Existing VCX System 133 Enter Y you must uppercase to indicate there are multiple UPS devices servicing the VCX system upsipaddr IP Address of the UPS Enter the IP address of the first UPS Use dotted decimal notation but do not enter leading zeros For example enter 10 230 63 3 not 010 230 063 003 community community string of the UPS gt Enter the SNMP community string configured on the first UPS to enable communication between the master VCX server and the UPS Typically the community string is private to allow Read or Write access upsipaddrl IP Address of the second UPS gt Enter the IP address of the second UPS communityl community string of the second UPS Enter the SNMP community string configured on the second UPS to enable communication between the master VCX server and the UPS Typically the community string is private to allow Read or Write access bcharge UPS battery threshold charge gt Enter UPS battery threshold charge allowed before starting a shutdown of the VCX system The threshold charge is expressed as a percentage of remaining battery power The default is 2596 The range from 25 to 75 The following example shows the syntax required to initially configure a master VCX server vex ups setup master Y monitormultipleups Y upsipaddr 10 230 63 3 community private
287. re available enter this command vex os query The output from this command appears OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 1 dev hda2 A B 5 1 3 dev hda3 B active The operating system versions that you see may vary from the example shown The order of the A and B versions may be reversed depending on the upgrade history of the system When you are downgrading use the earlier of the two operating system versions in this command vex os switch 4 2 1 To confirm that you have selected the operating system version that you want repeat the vex os query command Verify that the word selected appears in the Status column for the version that you want Example OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 1 dev hda2 A selected B 5 1 3 dev hda3 B active Reboot the system using this command reboot When the system reboots it starts VCX 7 0 services 300 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE p Downgrading the Call Records Server The Call Records server is a stand alone server it has no secondary server To downgrade a Call Records server perform these steps To switch the VCX version log in as root and enter this command vex switchversion manual 7 x Example vex switchversion manual 7 0 0c The vex switchversion command m Stops VCX services m Changes a link to point to the requested VCX version m Issues a warning that databases must be restored CAUTION Do not reboot the system or
288. re configured IP address assigned to the UPS m SNMP community string You must know the pre configured SNMP write community string assigned to the UPS m Low battery threshold percentage You must specify the battery charge level expressed as a percentage of battery capacity at which point the attached server or servers should initiate a shutdown You must also supply the following information for each VCX server m Whether a server is the master or a slave m On each slave server the IP address of the master VCX server This section describes how to configure a VCX system supported by a single UPS Depending on your VCX configuration this requires one or two general steps m f your VCX system includes a single VCX server configure that system as the master m If your VCX system includes multiple VCX servers configure one server as the master and the remaining servers as slaves Single UPS System Configuring the Master VCX Server To initially enable and configure a VCX server as the master in a single UPS system Log in using the root account to the VCX server you want to designate as the master Enter the following command vex ups setup configuration parameters You must concatenate the following vex ups setup command configuration parameters responses are shown in bold master Y Enter Y you must uppercase to designate this server as the master monitormultipleups N 128 CHAPTER 8 MA
289. reboots When the reboot process has been completed the System starts VCX 7 1 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 xc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 xc Repeat steps 1 through 8 for all the other branch office servers in Region 2 During the upgrade of a VCX server you are asked if you want to enable UPS monitoring UPS monitoring can also be enabled after you upgrade to VCX version 7 1 software See Chapter 8 especially Adding UPS Support to an Existing VCX System or more information on UPS monitoring 212 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 This section assumes you have answered y to the following prompt during an upgrade to VCX version 7 1 software An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance wi
290. rectory server as cworks cd opt 3com VCX vexdata bin setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for Region 2 b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE prompt appears Enter the number of Master sites To determine the number of Master Sites associated with this office use the istVcxdata command See Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP 200 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 Upgrading the Regional IP Messaging Servers Telephony and Messaging Server for more information In this example there is one Master site Region 1 C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on this server the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 If there are more than one Master Sites this question repeats until the number of master sites specified in step b is reached e The Do you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The
291. rectory server database Install the Region 2 VCX Authentication and Directory server database R2DB on the VCX Authentication and Directory server for Region 1 a Log on as cworks on the primary Region 1 VCX Authentication and Directory server and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin installVcxdata b Select option 2 to BACKUP ROCSA c Enter the VCX Site ID of Region 2 when prompted The Do you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears d Enter y Install the Region 1 VCX Authentication and Directory server database R1DB on the VCX Authentication and Directory server for Region 2 a Log on as cworks on the primary Region 2 VCX Authentication and Directory server and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin installVcxdata b Select option 2 to BACKUP ROCSA c Enter the VCX Site ID of Region 1 when prompted The Do you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears 94 CHAPTER 6 MANUALLY CONFIGURING MULTI MASTER REPLICATION 3 p d Enter y If you are setting up replication after provisioning data has been added to the regional database the following procedure for backing up and restoring data must be performed otherwise continue with step 4 Backing up and restoring databases is not necessary if replication is set up after a fresh install on the Authentication and Directory servers in other words there is no data in the databases
292. region configuring replication 93 replication configuring for IP Telephony and IP Messaging server 91 configuring for IP Telephony server 91 configuring region to region 93 manually configuring region to region 93 multi master described 90 verifying 96 replication errors checking for 96 deleting 99 restarting Call Processor service 55 Common Agent service 53 IP Messaging service 62 SIP Phone downloader service 61 restoring databases 80 VCX configurations 70 S Schema exporting 85 verifying in a region 97 Secondary servers 18 server logging 59 enabling 59 services verifying operation 51 showmachineid command 257 single user mode user MAC command 150 single site configuration options 19 SIP 21 SIP Phone Downloader service 17 SIP Phone downloader service restarting 61 starting 61 Stopping 61 SNMP support enabling 60 managing authorized stations 63 verifying 60 starting Accounting service 57 Authentication and Directory service 57 Call Processor service 54 Common Agent service 52 IP Messaging service 62 SIP Phone downloader service 61 stopping Accounting service 57 Authentication and Directory service 57 Call Processor service 55 Common Agent service 52 IP Messaging service 62 SIP Phone downloader service 61 Super CDRs managing 37 viewing 41 T table data exporting 85 exporting for a single table 85 importing 86 timezone configuration 47 Tomcat clear cache 47 monitoring log files 48 starting 46
293. ress of primary Authentication and Directory server gt opt 3com VCX vcxdata db import If you are prompted to verify the authenticity of the host enter y This permanently adds the IP address to the list of known hosts Repeat step 3 to copy the backup file to the secondary Authentication and Directory server N CAUTION When you use the scp command to copy the database backup files to the down server you may see a warning message about a man in the middle attack This message indicates that the security key that was associated with the down server has changed and the running server does not recognize the down server s new security key The change to the security key is a normal consequence of the disk replacement process To resolve this issue locate the known hosts file on the running server opt home cworks ssh known hosts and perform one of these actions m Edit the file locate the line that contains the IP address of the down server and replace the old key with the new key m Edit the file locate the line that contains the IP address of the down server and remove that line m Delete the known hosts file If you use this method the next time you try to access any of the other VCX servers using commands such as Backing Up and Restoring the Authentication and Directory Server Database 83 scp or ssh you will be prompted to confirm that you want to trust the target server Log in to both the primary and second
294. restart VCX services until databases have been restored The VCX 7 0 version has been selected but the databases still contain 7 1 versioned data This combination will not operate successfully Update the pointer to the configuration file using this command SetConfigFile opt 3com VCX conf VCXConfiguration xml If necessary switch to the previous version of the operating system The upgrade from 7 0 to 7 1 may or may not have required the installation of a new VCX operating system version This step describes how to determine if a new operating system version was installed and if so how to revert to the previous version The examples in this step use the assumption that upgrading from version 7 0 to 7 1 changed the operating system version from 4 2 1 to 5 1 3 a Login as root b To determine which operating system versions are available enter this command vex os query The output from this command appears Example OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 1 dev hda2 A B 5 1 3 dev hda3 B active The operating system versions that you see may vary from the example shown p Downgrading from 7 1 to 7 0 301 The order of the A and B versions may be reversed depending on the upgrade history of the system c When you are downgrading use the earlier of the two operating system versions in this command vex os switch 4 2 1 d To confirm that you have selected the operating system version that you want repeat the vex o
295. ring Region to Region Replication Verifying Replication at a Branch Office Verifying the Number of VCX Data Schemas in a Region Deleting Replication Errors 90 CHAPTER 6 MANUALLY CONFIGURING MULTI MASTER REPLICATION Multi Master Replication Overview Multi Master Replication MMR is the process of copying and maintaining database tables in multiple databases that make up a distributed database system Changes applied at one site are captured and stored locally before being forwarded and applied at each of the remote locations Oracle replication is a fully integrated feature of the Oracle server it is not a separate server 3Com recommends and only supports MMR which is comprised of multiple master sites equally participating in an update anywhere model Updates made to an individual master site are sent to all other participating master sites Some advantages to MMR include m Supports highly available data access by remote sites m Provides data that is updated frequently and propagated automatically wm Allows real time data propagation m Can provide failover protection When you set up MMR the databases to be replicated must be in the same state If for example database A has been populated with provisioning data and database B is empty you can set up replication between A and B but A s data will not be copied to database B In this case you must back up database A and restore it on database B then se
296. root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin dropReplication When the script prompts you enter the site ID of the Master Site Restore Databases Before upgrading from version 7 0 to 7 1 you must have backed up the system databases Restore the database on branch office server See Restoring the VCX Authentication and Directory Server Database VCX systems require database replication between the regional and branch office servers You must restore the database on both the regional Data server and the branch office server If the branch office server is running the IP Messaging software restore the IP Messaging database See the P Messaging Operations and System Administration Guide VCX systems require mirroring between IP Messaging servers You must restore the database on both the regional office IP Messaging server and the branch office server Downgrading from 7 1 to 7 0 303 Establish Database Replication On Master Definition Site establish database replication On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop S70tomcat stop On the Master Site the secondary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat
297. rovided and then supply the appropriate values for the placeholders that appear in angle brackets Example To enable RIPIP use the following syntax SETDefault port RIPIP CONTrol Listen In this example you must supply a port number for port Commands The word command means that you must enter the command exactly as shown and then press Return or Enter Commands appear in bold Example To remove the IP address enter the following command SETDefault 0 IP NETaddr 0 0 0 0 Words in italics Italics are used to m Emphasize a point Denote a new term at the place where it is defined in the text wm Identify menu names menu commands and software button names Examples From the Help menu select Contents Click OK Related Documentation 13 Related Documentation These 3Com documents contain additional information about the products in this release that are a part of or support the 3Com Convergence Applications Suite The following documents are a part of the VCX IP Telephony Solution a VCXInstallation Guide m VCX Maintenance Guide m VCX Administration Guide m VCX Basic Telephone Quick Reference Guide m VCX Business Telephone Quick Reference Guide a VCXManager s Telephone Quick Reference Guide m VCX Telephone Display Quick Reference Guide m VCX Basic Telephone Guide m VCX Business Telephone Guide m VCX Manager s Telephone Guide m VCX Feature Codes for Analog Telephones Qui
298. rs Enter site ID configured for this system For single site systems the site ID is identical for both the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press Enter to accept the default C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears 272 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of the primary IP Telephony server d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address of the secondary IP Telephony server e Thepno you want to continue with the above settings n y f prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes During script execution messages appear describing the replication setup Messages also appear stating that firewall setup should allow communication between the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server These messages are a reminder firewall setup was performed during VCX software installation The Have you executed the ABOVE mentioned VCX FIREWALL steps y n prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes When the replication is complete Multi Master Replication Stat
299. rsion 7 1 xc is now available Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 185 2 Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 xc The system displays several status messages and provides prompts that allow you enable Adhoc Conferencing and UPS Monitoring 3 The Adhoc Conferencing prompt appears In order to support ad hoc conferences with more than 3 participants the Adhoc Conference Service is used This service should be enabled on this server unless another Server dedicated to Adhoc Conferencing will be used instead If available a separate server typically provides greater capacity and may be shared among sites Use the Adhoc service on this server Y N Y If you want this server to act as a multi caller up to 6 callers conferencing server enter y If not enter n 4 The UPS Monitoring prompt appears An Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS can be used with VCX Systems to avoid disruption due to a power outage VCX provides a UPS monitoring service which tracks the UPS s Status and performs a safe shutdown when the its battery is depleted during a long power outage To use this feature you must have a compatible UPS installed and configured in accordance with the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N If you do not have a UPS installed and enter n or press Enter the remaining UPS configuration prompts are not displayed If you d
300. s To accomplish this it is necessary to carry out several steps including Stopping VCX services If certain parameters are changed it may also be necessary to discontinue any replication which may be occurring with other Servers Therefore this utility should only be run on a system which is not in active use Following reconfiguration you must follow the VCX documentation to bring all servers back online and to re establish replication if it was dropped The correct procedures must be followed for this process to succeed Do you wish to reconfigure the system at this time no yes Starting reconfiguration VCX services are currently running stopping them now Stopping VCX Services Stopping vcx devdnldsvr OK Stopping vcx callp OK Stopping vcx tomcat OK Stopping vcx ums OK Stopping vcx bssxml OK Stopping vcx acctxml OK Stopping vcx vcxglobaldir OK Stopping vex vexdata OK Stopping vcx upsmon OK Stopped VCX Services 9 stopped Do you want to change this system s networking configuration Answer yes if you want to modify the system s IP addresses default gateways or hostname If you say yes here replication will be dropped if it is in use Note If you are only changing the system s NTP DNS or timezone configuration you can use vcx config network instead of vcx reconfigure Sample VCX Server Reconfiguration 105 Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script contin
301. s cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Ensure that database replication has no errors see Preliminary Steps and then drop replication on the primary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks dropReplication The drop replication script starts Follow these steps 172 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for this system For single site systems the site ID is identical for both the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press Enter to accept the default c The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site or press Enter if the displayed address is correct This is typically the IP address of the primary VCX server d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is typically the IP address of the secondary VCX server e ThebDo you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes 4 Enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit 5 Stop IP Messaging first on the primary VCX server and then on the seco
302. s Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter the site ID configured for Region 1 b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE prompt appears Enter the number of Master sites To determine the number of Master sites associated with this server use the istVcxdata command See Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Telephony and Messaging Server for more information In this example there is one Master site Region 2 C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on this server the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 If there are more than one Master Sites this question repeats until the number of master sites specified in step b is reached 194 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 e TheDo you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes 5 Enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit 6 Obtain a copy of the vex dataserver 7
303. s call processors each running an Accounting service SalesW and EngW In this example you could create two Account service groups on the Call Records service The EastGroup includes the Accounting services SalesE and EngE The WestGroup includes the Accounting services SalesW and EngW Alternatively you could create two Account service groups Sales and Eng Sales would include SalesE and SalesW Eng would include EngE and EngW To create reports from individual CDRs or from a Super CDR use a CDR utility such as the VCX Call Reports application import the CDRs or the Super CDR and generate calling usage reports Configuring an Accounting Service Group Each Accounting service must be contained in a group A group must be created before you can add any Accounting services to the Call Records service You can configure as many groups as you want for your system but each Accounting service can only be assigned to one group VCX includes one Accounting service group named defaultGroup This group by default contains no Accounting services and is disabled You can either add Accounting services to the default group or you can create your own group or groups and add Accounting services You create groups and add Accounting services by running the config sh script on the server hosting the Call Records service The config sh script uses the term Accounting Server In all cases this term refers to the Accounting service ru
304. s cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin setupReplication When the script prompts you enter the site ID of the Master Site Verify Database Replication Wait at least 20 minutes to allow time for database replication to be completed Enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin checkReplication The message that appears should contain the word NORMAL If it does not wait for a few more minutes and then repeat the command Do not proceed beyond this point until you see the NORMAL message Switch Operating System version The upgrade from 7 0 to 7 1 may or may not have required the installation of a new version of the VCX operating system This procedure describes how to determine if a new operating system version was VON Downgrading from 7 1 to 7 0 297 installed and if so how to revert to the previous version This operation must be performed on all VCX servers The examples in this procedure use the assumption that upgrading from version 7 0 to 7 1 changed the operating system version from 4 2 1 to 5 1 3 Log in as root To determine which operating system versions are available enter this command vex os query The output from this command appears OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 1 dev hda2 A B 5 1 3 dev hda3 B active The operating system versions that you see may vary from the example shown The order of the A and B versions may be reversed depending on the
305. s in this section are based on a multi site VCX system that includes two regions Region 1 AN Multi Site VCX System Upgrade Order Upgrading the Regional Authentication and Directory Servers Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 275 and Region 2 with multiple branch offices in each region The procedures describe the upgrade process for both local and global messaging All upgrade commands are executed locally at the console When upgrading a region to region office configuration you must drop replication between the Authentication and Directory server in each region CAUTION When upgrading a multi site VCX system upgrade the regional servers before upgrading the branch servers If you upgrade the branch servers first the database schema on the branches may not match the schema version on the region causing database replication failure When upgrading a multi site VCX system configuration upgrade the components in the following order Upgrade the replicated Authentication and Directory servers in each regional office m Upgrade the IP Messaging servers in each regional office wm Upgrade the Call servers in each regional office wm Upgrade the Call Records server optional m Upgrade the branch offices hosted by a region This section describes how to upgrade the Authentication and Directory servers in Region 1 and Region 2 To upgrade the Authentication and Directory servers in a two region VCX
306. s query command Verify that the word selected appears in the Status column for the version that you want Example OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 1 dev hda2 A selected B 5 1 3 dev hda3 B active Reboot the system using this command reboot When the system reboots it starts VCX 7 0 services Downgrading a Branch Office Server If you attempt to upgrade a branch office server but the upgrade is unsuccessful you must downgrade and contact 3Com Support for assistance Switch VCX Version To switch the VCX version Log in as root and enter this command vex switchversion manual 7 x Example vex switchversion manual 7 0 0c The vex switchversion command m Stops VCX services m Changes a link to point to the requested VCX version m Issues a warning that databases must be restored CAUTION Do not reboot the system or restart VCX services until databases have been restored The VCX 7 0 version has been selected but 302 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE the databases still contain 7 1 versioned data This combination will not operate successfully Update the pointer to the configuration file using this command SetConfigFile opt 3com VCX conf VCXConfiguration xml Stop Database Replication On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop On the Master Site the secondary server log in as
307. s sample script the DNS search path remains unchanged 108 CHAPTER 7 RECONFIGURING A VCX SERVER Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued Enter NTP servers one at a time When done Primary NTP Server Secondary NTP Server enter 0 0 0 0 to stop 10 35 10 51 10 36 10 51 Configuring Network Time Protocol In this sample script NTP server IP addresses remain unchanged CAUTION If VCX systems are not synchronized via NTP timing related problems can occur Configuring Time Zone Please select a geographic location from the following list 1 Africa Americas Antarctica Arctic Ocean Asia Atlantic Ocean Australia Europe 9 Indian Ocean 10 Pacific Ocean Enter continent 2 aN HU FWD Please select a country from the following list 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 255 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 1 Antigua amp Barbuda 2 Anguilla 3 Netherlands Antilles 4 Argentina 5 Aruba 6 Barbados 7 Bolivia 8 Brazil 9 Bahamas 10 Belize 11 Canada 12 Chile 13 Colombia 14 Costa Rica 15 Cuba 16 Dominica 17 Dominican Republic Enter country 44 Ecuador Grenada French Guiana Greenland Guadeloupe Guatemala Guyana Honduras Haiti Jamaica St Kitts amp Nevis Cayman Islands St Lucia Martinique Montserrat Mexico Nicaragua Ww Ui WWW w wo 0 1 vn B e Boa oa au AB B N Q 0 1 O Ui amp Q0 NH Baume Panama Peru St Pierre
308. sages The last two messages are mem Installation Completed Successfully mmc VCX version 7 1 yc is now available Change to the new software version by entering this command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 yc services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc Upgrading the Branch Offices Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 247 This section describes how to upgrade branch offices Each branch office is associated with a regional office As noted in Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices multi site VCX systems can be categorized by the method used to implement messaging global messaging local messaging or Global Voicemail Integration The procedures in this section are based on a multi site VCX system that includes two regions Region 1 and Region 2 For this example system the branches in Re
309. script executes When the replication is complete Multi Master Replication Status is reported as NORMAL Do not continue to the next step on this server until the replication is complete Note that replication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete f You can check the replication by entering the following command checkReplication Once replication is complete and status is NORMAL on Region 1 and Region 2 start the Authentication and Directory servers in each region by entering the following commands while logged in as root cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start Start the Tomcat process on the primary Call server and the secondary Call server in each region by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat start This section describes how to upgrade regional IP Messaging servers These servers may provide messaging services for users using one of the following methods m Global Voicemail Integration In version 7 1 multi site VCX systems can be configured to use Global Voicemail Integration This service is Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 201 provided by a pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS to enable global voicemail integration on an entire IP Messaging system See Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices and the IP Messaging documentation m Local messaging Messaging services are provided to remote users by the r
310. secondary in a multi site VCX system You need to perform the steps in this section on a console attached to each Call server in all regions Region 1 and Region 2 in this example Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 245 To upgrade the Call servers 1 Log on as root to the primary Call server and the secondary Call server in a region 2 Obtain a copy of the vex callserver 7 1 yc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary Call server and on the secondary Call server 3 Upgrade the primary Call server by following these steps a Start the upgrade process by entering the following commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx callserver 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are dececerercesLeeeue Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 yc is now available b Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 y Call server c After the system has completed
311. section briefly describes the basic hardware configurations that support VCX systems Refer to the VCX Installation Guide for more information Because VCX system software can be installed in a wide variety of hardware configurations you must understand how your VCX system has been installed before you configure its components Single Site Configurations Multi Site Configurations VCX Hardware Configurations 19 There are two basic configuration options single site and multi site systems The hardware servers in each option type run the VCX operating system Currently supported hardware platforms include m 7 000 series systems with IBM X306m or IBM X346 servers m V6000 Integrated Branch Communications servers m V6100 Integrated Branch Communications servers The next two sections describe typical examples of single site and multi site configurations This section describes two possible single site configurations One Pair of Servers This configuration includes one pair of servers The primary server and the secondary server both run the IP Telephony and IP Messaging configuration The Call Records Service is enabled on the primary server only m Two Pair of Servers This configuration includes two pairs of servers Two servers run the IP Telephony software configuration The Call Records Service is enabled on the primary server only a Two servers run the IP Messaging configuration Multi site configurations can be conf
312. service If your VCX system does not include a Call Records service you can configure the Accounting service to be self cleaning by editing the Accounting service configuration file or modifying the appropriate SNMP MIB variables To modify the Accounting service configuration file Log in to the server running the Accounting service using the root account Enter the following command cd opt 3com VCX acctxml conf Use an editor to open the following file acctxmlconfig xml In the lt CONFIGURATION_INFO gt section locate the lt BES_CDRFILE_CONFIG gt subsection and find the following variables AUTO CLEAN IF NO LATEST UPDATE N AUTO CLEAN IF NO LATEST UPDATE INTERVAL 96 The first variable determines whether or not CDRs are purged if the Accounting service has not received notification from the Call Records service within the time period 96 hours specified by the second variable By default the variable auro_CLEAN IF NO LATEST UPDATE is set to N If you have Call Records service configured to collect CDRs from the 50 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS QDR File Maintenance Accounting server do not change this setting The Call Records service will purge CDRs from the Accounting server after collecting them If you do not have Call Records service change this setting to AUTO CLEAN IF NO LATEST UPDATE Y to enable self cleaning on the Accounting service The variable AUTO CLEAN IF NO LATEST UPDAT
313. services 32 catalina out monitoring 48 CDR collecting 28 managing 37 storage managing 49 super CDR 28 understanding 37 viewing 40 codec changing 65 installing 65 overview 64 supported types 64 commands vcx assemble 166 216 vcx backup query using 74 vox config backup 70 using 72 vox config network 47 vox config restore 70 using 75 vox config services 56 vox install 65 vcx licenseinstall 257 vcx licensequery 258 vox listversions 166 216 vcx os query 297 309 vcx os switch 297 309 voxreconfigure 63 102 vocshowconfigtype 168 218 vox showmachineid 257 vox ups setup 125 vcx ups status 125 Common Agent service 17 restarting 53 starting 52 stopping 52 configuration options hardware 19 software 17 configuring Accounting service group 29 daylight savings 47 region to region replication 93 timezones 47 conventions notice icons 12 text 12 cpy4 out monitoring 49 CSV files as input for user MAC command 156 161 CWDATA 85 341 single site 294 version 7 1 y to version 7 1 x 305 multi site 309 single site 306 D data importing saved table 86 databases backing up 80 replicating 90 restoring 80 daylight savings configuration 47 deleting Accounting service from a group 35 Accounting service groups 31 replication errors 99 disabling Accounting service groups 31 downgrade version 7 0 to version 6 0 317 multi site 322 single site 318 version 7 1 to version 7 0 293 multi site 298 E eml_cl
314. sions may be reversed depending on the upgrade history of the system When you are downgrading use the earlier of the two operating system versions in this command vex os switch 4 2 1 To confirm that you have selected the operating system version that you want repeat the vex os query command Verify that the word selected appears in the Status column for the version that you want Example OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 1 dev hda2 A selected B 5 1 3 dev hda3 B active Reboot the Server Reboot the system using this command reboot When the system reboots it starts VCX 7 1 x services Downgrading from 7 1 y to 7 1 x 305 Downgrading from 7 1 y to 7 1 x Important Considerations Follow the procedures in this section to downgrade your VCX system from version 7 1 y to 7 1 x Before performing a downgrade keep these considerations in mind Downgrades are typically performed for one of the following reasons a You have successfully upgraded your VCX system but want to revert to the previous version of VCX system software During a VCX system upgrade one component fails to upgrade and want to revert to the previous version of VCX system software If a component fails to upgrade contact your 3Com Support for assistance before proceeding To use the downgrade procedures in this section your VCX system must have previously been successfully running version 7 1 x The downgrade procedure does not
315. sor m Computed Mean Opinion Score Average a Jitter Average QoS Monitoring Statistics 43 m Packet Loss Average m Round Trip Delay Average Note the following QoS monitoring considerations m QoS configuration information for example monitored endpoints and thresholds is persistent across system reboots and upgrades m The endpoint statistics and call history tables available for viewing through EMS do not persist across reboots of the system upgrades or restarts of the Accounting server m No QoS data is lost it is all available in the XML formatted QDRs stored by the Accounting server For more information on using QoS monitoring and collecting QoS statistics refer to the EMS version 2 3 documentation 44 CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING THE CALL RECORDS SERVICE MANAGING VCX SERVERS This chapter describes various maintenance tasks you may need to perform on the VCX services running on servers in your VCX system Most maintenance tasks require logging in to a VCX server using one of the VCX system accounts Each account has an associated password See About VCX Passwords for more information This chapter includes the following topics a Managing the Tomcat Web Server m Changing a Daylight Saving and Time Zone Configuration a Managing Log and CDR Files m Verifying Service Operation a Managing the Common Agent a Managing the Call Processor Service a Managing the Accounting Service and the Authentication and Direct
316. splays several status messages The last two messages are Home Installation Completed Successfully sme VCX version 7 1 yc is now available Change to the new software version by entering this command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots When the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 yc services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering the following command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX gt opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc 234 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices Some multi site VCX systems have regional offices and branch offices Each branch office is associated with a regional office Multi site VCX systems can be categorized by the method used to implement messaging In a multi site VCX system configured to use oca messaging the IP Messaging server is co located with the IP Telephony server at each branch office In this case each branch office provides messaging services for its
317. start database replication The steps that document this procedure state that replication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete The actual time required depends on the size of the database The steps describe how to ensure replication has completed Acquire the necessary license For version 7 0 you must obtain and install a license key file for each VCX server before you can upgrade from a previous release See License Keys for more information Depending on your configuration you may need to upgrade the following VCX software components and configurations IP Telephony and IP Messaging server software Supported on a Single site systems with two servers a Multi site systems configured on regional offices with no branch offices a Multi site systems configured on branch offices that use local IP Messaging IP Telephony server software Supported on a Single site systems with four servers a Multi site systems configured on branch offices that use global IP Messaging IP Messaging server software Supported on a Single site systems with four servers a Multi site systems configured on regional offices that use global or local IP Messaging p Post Upgrade Requirements Overview of a 6 0 to 7 0 Upgrade 255 With version 7 0 you can set up IP Messaging in a client server configuration An IP Messaging server can support up to 20 IP Messaging clients See the P Messaging Operations and System Administration
318. stributed nature of a VCX system there is no centralized source for configuration data Therefore to completely back up an entire VCX system you must perform a configuration backup operation on each machine in your VCX system 3Com Corporation recommends that you back up configuration files on your VCX system once a week However you should back up a configuration whenever you make changes A restored system will not include configuration changes made after the last backup was performed The backup file created by the vex config backup command includes the following configuration data m VCX components All files containing configuration information for each VCX component are saved including directory structures a Common configuration files Configuration files common to multiple VCX components such as VCXConfiguration xml and VSBOM xml files as well as state files and any other configuration data created by the VCX infrastructure are saved to the backup file m Operating system files All VCX operating system files that contain configuration information that could be modified by the user or that provide system unique information are backed up This typically includes data such as account and password information networking configuration files time zone information SSH host keys and SSL certificate s N Backup and Restore Considerations VCX Configuration Backup and Restore Overview 71 Note that the vex co
319. t up replication see Backing Up and Restoring the Authentication and Directory Server Database Replicated Table Location The tables located in the opt 3com VCX vcxdata db vcxdata bulkload directory are automatically replicated These tables make up the VCX Authentication and Directory Services database schema Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Telephony and Messaging Server 91 Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Telephony and Messaging Server This section provides instructions on how to manually perform database replication for these two configurations Regional P Telephony Server An IP Telephony Server configuration includes the Accounting Services the Call Records Services the Call Processor and the Authentication and Directory Services In this case there is only one Region the single site One server is designated as the Primary and one is designated the Secondary m Regional P Telephony and Messaging Server An IP Telephony and Messaging Server configuration includes the Accounting Services the Call Records Services the Call Processor IP Messaging Services and the Authentication and Directory Services In this case there is only one Region the single site One server is designated as the Primary and one is designated the Secondary For these configurations replication must be started manually with the setupReplicatio
320. t 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc Stop the Authentication and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Follow the steps in this section to upgrade the secondary IP Messaging server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the secondary IP Messaging server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx ipmsg 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Hee dine esis Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 yc is now available Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 y IP Messaging services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is
321. t 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc Stop the Authentication and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Follow the steps in this section to set up database replication Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary VCX server and then on the secondary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Set up replication on the primary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears 224 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y Enter site ID configured for this system For single site systems the site ID is identical for both the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server b The Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 prompt appears Press Enter to accept the default C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Mast
322. t gt value lt last gt lt email gt value lt email gt lt streetl gt value lt street1 gt lt street2 gt value lt street2 gt lt city gt value lt city gt lt statesvalue lt state gt lt country gt value lt country gt lt zip gt value lt zip gt lt site gt value lt site gt lt remote gt value lt remote gt lt pprofile gt value lt pprofile gt transaction transaction type mod lt uname gt value lt uname gt lt whatever fields are to be changed gt lt newUname gt value lt newUname gt lt newPhone gt value lt newPhone gt transaction transaction type delete gt lt uname gt value lt uname gt transaction lt user MAC transactions gt XML Default Values Default values are supplied to user mac command processing in a default XML file usez MAC defaults xm1 The structure of this file is specified in the following DTD file user MAC defaults dtd lt ELEMENT user MAC defaults password phonepass title first middle last email 160 CHAPTER 10 MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE street1 street2 city state country zip site remote pprofile gt lt ELEMENT password PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT phonepass PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT title PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT first PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT middle PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT last PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT email PCDATA gt lt E
323. ta DUMP ONE TAB p dir p tabname end Data for all tables can be exported in a schema to the export directory listed in the Oracle initialization folder Runtime tables cannot be exported 86 CHAPTER 5 MANAGING AUTHENTICATION AND DIRECTORY SERVICE DATABASES Importing Saved Table Data gt gt To export all the tables in a schema From a SQL Plus command line login as lt schema gt Execute the following For this procedure change the following to match the system a Change the value of p dir to the export directory m Make sure to enter the procedure name EXACTLY as shown SET SERVEROUTPUT ON declare p dir varchar2 255 begin p dir tmp export CWDATA DUMP ALL TAB p dir end Once saved see Exporting Table Data the data can be imported into any Authentication and Directory server database as long as the version numbers for the exporting and importing servers match The following methods may overwrite existing files in the opt 3com VCX lt schema gt db lt schema gt bulkload directory To prevent files from being overwritten rename or move the current txt files If the data in the database and the data being importing have duplicated data the duplicate data needs to be cleared before loading custom data Tables need to be manually edited using a graphic tool such as Oracle DB Studio if the entire database is not being cleared Import the saved table data as follows m To install a new back
324. tails prompt appears The configured groups are listed above the prompt Enter the name of the group you want to view the name is not case sensitive The group details and associated Accounting services are listed Enabling and Disabling Groups gt Deleting Groups Configuring an Accounting Service Group 31 You can enable or disable configured groups A disabled group stops collecting CDRs from member Accounting services The CDRs are stored on each server hosting an Accounting service and accumulate as long as there is enough disk space When you create a group it is enabled by default However the VCX supplied Accounting service group named defaultGroup is in a disabled state by default To enable or disable an accounting group Log on to the VCX server hosting the Call Records service as cworks and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX bssxml bin config sh A menu of configuration options appears followed by the SELECT OPERATION prompt At the prompt enter 102 Either the Enter the Group Name to Enable or the Enter the Group Name to Disable prompt appears depending on the state of the group The configured groups are listed above the prompt Enter the name of the group you want to enable or disable The Do you want to Enable Disable this Group y n prompt appears Enter either y or n depending on the state you need the group to be in The new state is applied to the group and you are returned to th
325. te requests to this system Write Community String private Press the Enter or Return key to accept the existing write community string or enter a new string The Read Community String specifies the community string to be used by a management station when sending read requests to this system Read Community String public Press the Enter or Return key to accept the existing read community string or enter a new string Sample VCX Server Reconfiguration 121 Sample VCX Reconfiguration Script continued Common Agent supports a management station authentication feature Answering Y here will allow only a set of pre identified SNMP management Stations to manage the system You will be able to enter IP addresses of authorized management stations next Authorized management stations can also be configured using EMS or another management station at a later point Enable management station authentication N Press the Enter or Return key to accept the default answer N and continue with no management station authentication Enter Y if you want to specify up to four management station IP addresses Do you wish to change any of the Common Agent parameters N Press the Enter or Return key to accept the default answer N and use the data that you have accepted or modified Enter Y to make additional changes VCX reconfiguration is now complete Before the information just entered is saved you have the option of reviewing an
326. teCli bin 3 Start the remoteCLl interface remoteCli callprocessor At the remoteCli prompt gt enter config acctc use false Adding Primary and Secondary Authentication and Directory Servers Configuring Accounting and Directory Services 147 config accts pri 2 IpAddress IP address of secondary accounting server config accts pri 2 LocalIpAddress lt IP address of call processor config acctc use true 5 The interface lists the IP address of the new Accounting server 6 To exit the remoteCLI interface enter exit To add a primary Authentication and Directory Server using the remoteCLl interface Log onto the server hosting the primary Call Processor Navigate to the opt 3com VCX callprocessor remoteCli bin Start the remoteCLI interface remoteCli callprocessor At the remoteCli prompt enter config authc use false config auths pri 1 IpAddress lt IP address of primary Authentication and Directory server gt config auths pri 1 LocalIpAddress lt IP address of call processor config authc use true The interface lists the IP address of the new Authentication and Directory Server To exit the remoteCLI interface enter exit To add a secondary authentication server using the remoteCLI interface Log onto the server hosting the primary Call Processor Navigate to the opt 3com VCX callprocessor remoteCli bin Start the remoteCLI interface remoteCli callprocessor At the rem
327. tem starts VCX 7 1 y services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all the other branch office servers in Region 2 250 APPENDIX B UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 1 x TO V7 1 Y UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 To V7 0 This appendix describes the procedures required to upgrade a system running VCX server software version 6 0 to VCX server software version 7 0 This appendix includes the following topics m Verifying Software Versions m Overview of a 6 0 to 7 0 Upgrade wm Upgrading a Single Site System With Two Servers m Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers wm Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices m Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices During a VCX system upgrade or downgrade users cannot make calls within the system However users may be able to make emergency calls or make calls to and receive calls from destinations outside of the VCX system that is the PSTN This capability depends on the availabili
328. temp directory on the primary IP Messaging server and on the secondary IP Messaging server 3 Upgrade the primary IP Messaging server by following these steps a Start the upgrade process by entering the following commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx ipmsg 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Eum Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available b Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File c Install the license key See Installing a License Key File 282 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 d Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 0 xc e Specify whether this IP Messaging system will support IP Messaging clients The upgrade script displays the following prompt for the primary IP Messaging server only Will this system support IPMSG client systems N IP Messaging can be deployed in a client server configuration to support more users and distribute services If you enter N this system will be configured as the primary IP Messaging server and no client configurati
329. ter the following command to change directories cd opt 3com VCX bin Enter the following command to start the manage authorized stations script cagManageAuthorizedStations The script displays the following menu Manage Authorized Stations Menu kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk show Display existing authorized stations configuration add Add a new authorized station 64 CHAPTER 3 MANAGING VCX SERVERS delete Remove an authorized station entry quit exit this utility help show commands that are supported kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk supported commands are show add delete quit help To add an SNMP management station enter aaa The script prompts you to enter the IP address and network mask of the management station you want to add To delete an existing SNMP management station enter delete The script prompts you to enter the IP address and network mask of the management station you want to delete To display a list of the SNMP stations currently allowed access to this server enter show Changing Codecs Before voice traffic can be transmitted over a digital network the audio waveform an analog signal must be encoded into a digital format The digitized audio is packetized and delivered over the network to a destination and then decoded back into a voice waveform Software called a codec coder decoder converts the a
330. terface before enabling global voicemail integration on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers Refer to the P Messaging Module Operations and 192 APPENDIX A UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V7 0 TO V7 1 AN Multi Site VCX System Upgrade Order Upgrading the Regional Authentication and Directory Servers System Administration Guide for more information and for configuration options The components in a multi site VCX system can be set up in many possible configurations The procedures in this section are based on a multi site VCX system that includes two regions Region 1 and Region 2 with multiple branch offices in each region All upgrade commands are executed locally at the console When upgrading a region to region office configuration you must drop replication between the Authentication and Directory server in each region CAUTION When upgrading a multi site VCX system upgrade the regional servers before upgrading the branch servers If you upgrade the branch servers first the database schema on the branches may not match the schema version on the region causing database replication failure When upgrading a multi site VCX system configuration upgrade the components in the following order If you plan to enable Global Voicemail Integration install IP Messaging software on a pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers and then set up the GVCS through the IP Messaging administrator configuration interface
331. tes the running VCX version The running VCX version is preceded by a symbolic link icon 5 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 21 Apr 26 09 13 VCX gt opt 3com VCX 7 0 7c drwxr xr x 10 root root 4096 Mar 10 07 13 VCX 7 0 6c In this example the link points to version 7 0 7c The other listed release 7 0 6c is installed but not running For VCX systems running version 7 0 or higher you can log in as root and enter the following command vex listversions This command returns a list all of the installed releases and indicates the running VCX version 7_0_10_11 2005 10 24 active 7 0 9 10 2005 10 18 installed 7089 2005 10 10 installed 7078 2005 09 20 installed Overview of a 7 0 to 7 1 Upgrade 167 Overview of a 7 0 to 7 1 Upgrade This section provides an overview of the procedures required to upgrade your VCX system to an operational state from version 7 0 to 7 1 This appendix describes how to upgrade a VCX server by entering commands at a locally attached console You can also upgrade a VCX server remotely by using 3Com Corporation s Enterprise Management Suite EMS EMS is an SNMP based client server application Refer to the Enterprise Management Suite User Guide for VCX V7000 Components for information This section assumes the VCX system is successfully operating at version 7 0 7c before you perform the upgrade If your system is running an earlier version of VCX 7 0 software or VCX 6 0 software you must upgrade to
332. tes the host system is running as an IP Telephony and IP Messaging Server m Softswitch Indicates the host system is running as an IP Telephony Server ums Indicates the host system is running as an IP Messaging Server w callserver Indicates the host system is running as a Call Server a dataserver Indicates the host system is running as an Authentication and Directory Server m bss Indicates the host system is running as a Call Records Server a adhoc Indicates the host system is running as a dedicated adhoc Conference Server timestamp Specifies when the backup file was created using the format YYMMDDHHmm For example a backup file created on 28 April 2006 on a VCX IP Telephony and IP Messaging server named reg2a7 running version 7 1 1 would have the following filename reg2a7 VCX 7 1 1 all 060428104340 tar gz You can use the vex backup query command to view information about a backup file for example the version of VCX on which the archived file is based the backup date and backed up components To view the contents of a VCX configuration backup file Log in using the root account to the machine hosting the VCX configuration backup file you want to back view Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX backup vex backup query optional arguments lt backup filename gt Restoring a VCX Configuration 75 The optional arguments include help Displays informat
333. th the VCX documentation Enable UPS monitoring N y To complete UPS monitoring configuration on a VCX server 1 The upgrade script asks if this server will be powered by multiple Uninterruptible Power Supplies It is possible to use multiple UPS units to power a single Server if the server has redundant power supplies with Separate power connections Will multiple UPS s power this server N If this server has redundant power supplies each with its own UPS enter y If this server uses a single UPS enter n or press Enter 2 The upgrade script asks if you want to configure this server as the master A single UPS can power one or more VCX systems A UPS Master communicates directly with a UPS while a Slave communicates with the Master to get UPS status Only one Master system should monitor a given UPS If this VCX System is the only one connected to the UPS say Y here Note a VCX system s UPS Monitoring role is independent of any other role it may have within a VCX deployment Do you want this server to be the master N If you answer n to indicate that this server is a slave not the master you are prompted to enter the IP address of the master Enter the IP address of the master to complete UPS monitoring configuration for this server If you answer y to indicate that this server is the master continue to step 3 3 The upgrade script prompts you for the IP address of the UPS Upgrading a Multi Site
334. the CDRs gathered by multiple Accounting services and stored on multiple servers can be sent to a single Call Records service To view a CDR stored on a server hosting the Accounting service 1 Log on to server hosting the Accounting service as cworks 2 The CDRs are stored in the opt 3com VCX acctxml db export directory The newest CDR is listed last and looks similar to the following cdr200504111533531 c xml The file naming convention uses this format Viewing Super CDRs QoS Monitoring Statistics 41 cdr lt Year Month Date Hour Minutes ThreeExtraNumbers c xml A CDR looks similar to this cdr collection cdr a0 1 a0 a4 2 a4 a6 16 a6 a7 a7 gt lt a8 gt 1 lt a8 gt lt a951 lt a9 gt lt b151 lt b1 gt lt b3 gt 304010 lt b3 gt lt b6 gt 98437911 lt b6 gt lt b9 gt 304002 lt b9 gt lt c2 gt 598437 49 lt c2 gt lt e551 lt e5 gt lt e6 gt 20050411 20 32 22 lt e6 gt lt e8 gt 20050411 20 32 22 lt e8 gt lt 0 gt 20050411 20 32 43 lt f 0 gt lt 2 gt 21 lt f 2 gt lt f 3 gt 0 lt 3 gt lt h7 gt 1 lt h7 gt lt h8 gt 0 lt h8 gt lt j5 gt 2 lt j5 gt lt 11 gt 008fbe79 36a9 d911 89b3 b82da66107be lt 11 gt lt 00 gt 4 lt o0 gt lt 01 gt 114000001 lt o01 gt lt 02 gt sip 8475555000 10 10 10 10 lt 02 gt lt 04 gt 6 lt o 4 gt lt 05 gt 2 lt 05 gt lt j8 gt 8475555000 lt j8 gt lt cdr gt lt cdr_collection gt Super CDRs are stored on the Call Records service To view a Super CDR
335. the UPS remotely through a VCX server You can check the status of a UPS locally by using the vex ups status command or remotely by using EMS Adding UPS Support to an Existing VCX System UPS Setup Options You can add UPS support to an existing VCX system This section assumes that you have installed and configured the UPS device according to the manufacturer s instructions You can add one or two UPS devices to your VCX system Depending on the server configuration in your VCX system you can m Setup one UPS to service a single VCX server 126 CHAPTER 8 MANAGING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES m Setup two UPS devices to service a single VCX server with redundant power supplies m Setup one UPS to service multiple VCX servers m Setup two UPS devices to service multiple VCX servers through one server with redundant power supplies As a general rule the power requirements of devices serviced by a UPS should not exceed 8096 of UPS load capacity 3Com Corporation recommends that you consult with you UPS vendor or reseller for sizing assistance When UPS support includes multiple VCX servers one VCX server is designated the master The master server acts as the coordinator for the other VCX servers referred to as slaves The master communicates with the UPS the slaves communicate the master to get UPS status If power requirements call for more than one UPS the VCX system may include more than one master server Note
336. the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc This section describes how to upgrade branch offices Each branch office is associated with a regional office As noted in Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices multi site VCX systems can be categorized by the method used to implement messaging m Ina multi site VCX system configured to use oca messaging the IP Messaging server is co located with the IP Telephony server at each branch office In this case each branch office provides messaging services for its users 286 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 m In a multi site VCX system configured to use global messaging the IP Messaging server is located on the regional office Each branch office runs the IP Telephony server only In this case the regional office provides messaging services for users at each branch office The procedures in this section are based on a multi site VCX system that includes two regions Region 1 and Region 2 For this example system the branches in Region 1 use local messaging and the branches in Region 2 use global messaging All upgrade commands are executed locally at the console N CAUTION When upgrading a multi site VCX system upgrade the regional servers before upgrading the branch servers If you upgrade the branch servers first the database schema on the branches may not match the schema version on the region ca
337. the connected VCX system performs a graceful shutdown UPS monitoring lets a VCX system know when its UPS is about to run out of power so that it can shut down When power returns and the UPS battery has recharged to a level sufficient to allow another shutdown to complete the VCX system restarts automatically You can deploy a UPS in either a branch office or regional configuration m Branch Offices In a branch office environment a UPS supports a VCX branch system which is typically installed on a single VCX server Normally a branch office does not have support staff on hand to attend to equipment and may be unoccupied for long periods of time nights weekends holidays Consequently if the office loses power it is important that the VCX system automatically operate on UPS power shut down when UPS power is about to run out and restart when power is restored In this environment the UPS should only power the VCX system and any networking equipment for example a router switch or SIP gateway in use The UPS should not be used to power other servers or devices which require a graceful shutdown because there is no way to coordinate the shutdown of this other equipment with the VCX system wm Regional Offices In a regional office environment a VCX system may include multiple VCX servers which may share one or more UPS devices It is also possible for multiple UPS devices to power individual servers through use of redundant
338. the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 0 xc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc Repeat steps 2 through 8 for all the other branch office servers in Region 1 After upgrading all the branches restart the Tomcat process on the Call servers in Region 1 by logging in to each server as root and executing the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat start To upgrade the branch offices in Region 2 global messaging Stop the Tomcat process on the Call servers in Region 2 by logging in to each server as root and executing the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop 2 Login to the first branch office server as root 3 Obtain a copy of the vex softswitch 7 0 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the branch office server The variable x indicates the version of VCX software for example vex all 7 0 3c tar that will replace version 6 0 The letter c is always appended to the version number 288 APPENDIX C UPGRADING
339. the server Follow the downgrade procedures documented in this section only if you want to revert a successfully upgraded server from version 7 0 to version 6 0 Downgrading Regional Authentication and Directory Servers Each Region has an Authentication and Directory server Each server has a schema for its own database and a schema that acts as a backup for the schema in the other Region Follow the general steps in this section if a downgrade is required on a regional Authentication and Directory server See Downgrading a Single Site System for detailed information for each general step If you need to downgrade a branch server downgrade the branch before downgrading the regional Authentication and Directory server hosting that branch See Downgrading a Branch Office On each Authentication and Directory server you must switch versions of VCX software See Switch VCX Version For each schema you must a Login to each Authentication and Directory server and drop database replication See Stop VCX Database Replication m Remove both schemas on each region See Remove Version 7 0 Database Schemas m Create a schema on each region See Create Version 6 0 Database Schemas m Create backup schemas on each region using the following procedure a Login to the Authentication and Directory server in each region as CWorks b Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX vexdata bin installVcxdata 324
340. the steps in this section to upgrade the primary IP Telephony server To start the upgrade process enter these commands on the primary IP Telephony server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx softswitch 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are rjr Son esos en Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available 2 Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File 3 Install the license key See Installing a License Key File 4 Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vcx switchversion 7 0 xc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 x IP Telephony services Upgrading the Primary IP Messaging Server 1 Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 267 After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc
341. the upgrade process enter these commands on the primary IP Messaging server cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx ipmsg 7 1 yc tar cd upgrade 7 1 yc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are ScmtecccueA eere Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 1 yc is now available Switch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 1 yc The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 1 y IP Messaging services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command Upgrading the Secondary IP Telephony Server 1 Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers 229 ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 1 yc If the link does not point to the new version wait a few minutes and reenter the command This could take several minutes and it is important the link pointer is correct before proceeding Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 1 yc Follow the steps in this section to u
342. ting service or the Authentication and Directory service Log in to the server hosting the service you want to restart using the root account Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d back end server restart For back end server enter one of the following identifiers m For an Accounting service enter S40acctxml m For an Authentication and Directory service enter s20vexdata The files acctxmlconfig xml Accounting service and vcxdataconfig xml Authentication and Directory service each have a setting to enable message tracing through formatted Abstract Symbolic Notation ASN 1 This produces an understandable output that can be used for trouble locating and clearing ASN 1 is a message formatting and encoding standard which is the basis of the 3Queue protocol used between Tier 2 and Tier 3 To enable message tracing Log in to the server hosting the service using the root account 2 Stop the service see Stopping a Service 3 Enter the following command to change directories cd opt 3com VCX lt schema gt conf For schema enter acctxm1 for the Accounting service or enter vexdata for the Authentication and Directory service Edit the acctxmlconfig xml file or the vcxdataconfig xml file and enable Formatted ASN Packet Tracing Example lt Formatted ASN packet Tracing gt M lt 0 OFF 1 ON gt M lt ASNTRACE VALUE 1 gt Start the service see Starting a S
343. tions and System Administration Guide for information on backing up voicemail and other IP Messaging data In addition BEFORE you upgrade your VCX system to a new release perform these backups again If the upgrade fails and you must downgrade you can restore data from these backups as part of the downgrade procedure Prior to performing any upgrade you should check the following m Check the configuration type of the system you are going to upgrade The upgrade procedure you need to perform depends on your VCX system configuration see VCX Software Components and VCX_ Hardware Configurations You can use the vex showconfigtype command to verify the configuration type Your configuration determines the correct tar file or files required for the upgrade m You must stop database replication before starting the upgrade process On replicated systems check replication status to make sure it is normal To check replication status execute the following steps on the server hosting the Authentication and Directory services database Log in using the cworks account Enter ed opt 3com VCX vexdata bin 254 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 Enter checkReplication The returned status should be NORMAL If replication errors need to be cleared Enter deleteReplicationErrors q CAUTION Do not attempt an upgrade if there are replication errors that cannot be deleted After the upgrade you must re
344. tive The operating system versions that you see may vary from the example shown p Downgrading from 7 1 y to 7 1 x 313 The order of the A and B versions may be reversed depending on the upgrade history of the system c When you are downgrading use the earlier of the two operating system versions in this command vex os switch 4 2 0 d To confirm that you have selected the operating system version that you want repeat the vex os query command Verify that the word selected appears in the Status column for the version that you want Example OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 0 dev hda2 A selected B 4 2 1 dev hda3 B active Reboot the system using this command reboot When the system reboots it starts VCX 7 1 x services Downgrading a Branch Office Server If you attempt to upgrade a branch office server but the upgrade is unsuccessful you must downgrade and contact 3Com Support for assistance Switch VCX Version To switch the VCX version Log in as root and enter this command vex switchversion manual 7 x Example vex switchversion manual 7 1 0c The vex switchversion command m Stops VCX services m Changes a link to point to the requested VCX version m Issues a warning that databases must be restored CAUTION Do not reboot the system or restart VCX services until databases have been restored The VCX 7 1 x version has been selected 314 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE
345. to 7 1 y changed the operating system version from 4 2 0 to 4 2 1 Log in as root To determine which operating system versions are available enter this command vex os query The output from this command appears OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 0 dev hda2 A B 4 2 1 dev hda3 B active The operating system versions that you see may vary from the example shown The order of the A and B versions may be reversed depending on the upgrade history of the system When you are downgrading use the earlier of the two operating system versions in this command vex os switch 4 2 0 To confirm that you have selected the operating system version that you want repeat the vex os query command Verify that the word selected appears in the Status column for the version that you want Example OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 0 dev hda2 A selected B 4 2 1 dev hda3 B active Reboot the Server Reboot the system using this command reboot When the system reboots it starts VCX 7 1 x services For VCX systems that are installed at multiple sites upgrades and downgrades must be performed using a specific sequence of servers as described in this section CAUTION Back up all databases before beginning an upgrade 310 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE p Downgrading Regional Authentication and Directory Servers If a downgrade is required on a regional Authentication and Directory server
346. to the previous operating system version Follow steps 1 through 4 in Switch Operating System Versions and Reboot Do not enter the reboot command step 5 Instead enter the following commands to run firstboot script on the branch cd opt 3com VCX scripts firstboot F20vcxdata Wait at least 20 minutes to allow time for database replication to be completed Enter the following commands to verify that replication is complete cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin checkReplication The message that appears should contain the word NORMAL If it does not wait for a few more minutes and then repeat the command Do not continue until you see the NORMAL message Log in as root and start the Tomcat process first on the primary Call server and then on the secondary Call server by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d Downgrading from 7 0 to 6 0 327 S70tomcat start 14 Log in as root to the regional Authentication and Directory server associated with the branch and enter the following commands to start the globaldir service cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S30vexglobaldir start At this point because there is a version mismatch between the branch D database and the regional database you cannot access branch data through provisioning at the region You must use the provisioning interface on the branch server 328 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE VCX COMMANDS This appendix describes t
347. tral Server GVCS These components can be installed in various configurations as shown in Table 3 18 CHAPTER 1 VCX SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW Table3 VCX Software Configuration Options Standard Software Configurations IP Telephony Authentication Global and IP IP and Call VM Software IP Messaging Call Telephony Messaging Directory Records Central Service Server Server Server Server Server Server Server Call Processor Yes Yes Yes SIP Downloader Yes Yes Yes Authentication Yes Yes Yes and Directory Services Accounting Yes Yes Yes Services Provisioning Yes Yes Yes Services Common Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Agent IP Messaging Yes Yes Yes Services Call Records Yes Yes Yes Services VCX Hardware Configurations Depending on the hardware configuration some services are typically installed in redundant pairs For example the Call Processor Service is designed to run on redundant servers so if the primary server fails the secondary server can take over processing However during installation specific software services may or may not be enabled in a given software configuration For example the Call Records Service is designed to run on a single hardware platform In single site configurations the Call Records Service is enabled on the primary IP Telephony and Messaging or primary IP Telephony server only In a multi site system the Call Records Service is typically enabled on a dedicated server This
348. ts you enter the site ID of the branch Log in as root to the regional Authentication and Directory server associated with the branch and enter the following commands to stop the globaldir service cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S30vexglobaldir stop Log in as cworks on the regional Authentication and Directory server associated with the branch and enter the following commands to create a 6 0 branch schema cd opt 3com VCX 6 0 xc vcxdata bin installVcxdata For x enter the particular version of version 6 0 software for example 6 0 2 c Select option 1 and enter the site ID for the branch Restore the branch 6 0 data on the region 326 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE 10 11 12 13 a Copy the backup data tgz file for branch schema to the following two locations opt 3com VCX vocexdata db import opt 3com VCX vexdata db export b Enter the following commands cd opt 3com VCX 6 0 x vcxdata bin restoreVcxdata Enter the site ID for the branch Log in as cworks on the branch and delete the branch schema by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin dropVexdata Enter the site ID for the branch Log in as cworks on the branch and switch to previous version of VCX software by entering the following command vex switchversion manual 6 0 xc For x enter the particular version of version 6 0 software for example 6 0 2 c Log in as root on the branch and switch
349. tup command configuration parameters responses are shown in bold master N Enter N you must uppercase to indicate that this server is not the master monitormultipleups Y Enter Y you must uppercase to indicate there are multiple UPS devices servicing the VCX system upsserver IP Address of the master Enter the IP address assigned to ethO of the VCX server acting as the master UPS monitor Use dotted decimal notation but do not enter leading zeros For example enter 10 230 63 3 not 010 230 063 003 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all the other VCX servers in your system that you want to function as slaves Disabling UPS Monitoring on a VCX Server AN Adding UPS Support to an Existing VCX System 135 The following example shows the syntax required to initially configure a slave VCX server in a system supported by multiple UPS devices vcx ups setup master N monitormultipleups Y upsserver 10 230 63 5 When this command is executed m UPS monitoring is enabled on the current VCX server m The server is designated a slave m The VCX system will be serviced by multiple UPS devices m The IP address of the master VCX server is 10 230 63 5 After the initial slave VCX server configuration you can change a parameter value by reentering the vcx ups setup command In the following example the IP address of the master VCX server is changed vex ups setup master N monitormultipleups Y upsserver 10 23
350. ty configuration and capacity of the media gateway or gateways set up in the VCX system See the VCX Installation Guide for information on configuring a fail over call route point Also refer to your gateway documentation 252 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 Verifying Software This section describes how to verify the software versions of individual Versions components and entire releases Verifying Component Software Versions To verify what the component software versions are 1 Log onto the VCX system as root 2 Navigate to opt 3com VCX scripts 3 Enter this command vex assemble validate This lists all of the components and their software versions that comprise the current running assembly Verifying Release Software Version For any version of VCX software you can determine the release running on the system by following these steps 1 Log onto the VCX system as root 2 Enter the following commands cd opt 3com ls 1 This command returns a list all of the installed releases and indicates the running VCX version The running VCX version is preceded by a symbolic link icon 5 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 21 Oct 13 09 13 VCX opt 3com VCX 6 0 1c drwxr xr x 10 root root 4096 Oct 10 09 13 VCX 6 0 0c In this example the link points to version 6 0 1c The other listed release 6 0 0c is installed but not running Overview of a 6 0 This section provides an overview of the procedures require
351. uct the SIP URI for outbound SIP requests Enter the SIP default dialing domain SOLDI In this sample script the dialing domain remains unchanged The secondary Call Processor acts as a backup if the primary is down or unreachable IP address of the secondary Call Processor 10 230 67 41 Call Processor tasks are associated with the eth1 network interface Enter the IP address of eth1 on the secondary VCX server as it will be defined after the reconfiguration The secondary Authentication amp Directory Service acts as a backup to the primary Authentication amp Directory Service and provides authentication authorization and certain user specific functions IP address of the secondary Auth amp Dir Service 10 230 67 40 Authentication and Directory tasks are associated with the ethO network interface Enter the IP address of ethO on the Secondary VCX Server as it will be defined after the reconfiguration The secondary IP Messaging Service is a backup for voice mail and other messaging services In some configurations a dedicated IP Messaging Server runs this service IP address of the secondary IP Messaging Service 10 230 67 40 IP Messaging tasks are associated with the ethO network interface Enter the IP address of ethO on the Secondary VCX Server as it will be defined after the reconfiguration The primary Media Gateway acts as the interface between the VCX IP Telephony system and the external telephone network I
352. udio information between digital and analog formats Digitized audio formats have different properties Each format represents a compromise between bandwidth and audio quality that is high quality audio typically requires more network bandwidth Compressing the digitized audio data can conserve bandwidth with little compromise in audio quality but compression requires increased processing overhead when encoding and decoding the audio information Too much processing overhead can introduce delay IP Messaging can operate with either the G 711u codec or the G 729a codec Each codec includes a set of language prompts By default IP Messaging operates with the G 711u codec and US English language prompts Each set of language prompts available with the G 711u codec or the G 729a codec is constructed as RPM Package Manager package For example IP Messaging provides the following two RPMs for UK English m IPMSG UK EN G711u SPEAK 1 1 i386 rpm m IPMSG UK EN G729a SPEAK 1 1 i386 rpm How to Change Your Codec AN Changing Codecs 65 If you want to enable a set of language prompts that are compatible with the currently operating codec simply run the add language utility as described in Adding a Set of Language Prompts in the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide IP Messaging supports only one codec at a time m f you want your IP Messaging system to operate with a different codec for example switch fro
353. ued Do you want to change any networking configuration no yes Dropping replication please wait Copyright C 2005 3COM Corporation All rights reserved Multi Master Replication DROP Start Configuring Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site Id testone Enter the site ID for this server Enter the Number of MASTER SITEs other than the MASTER DEFINITION SITE 1 Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address 10 230 64 30 10 230 64 40 The term Master Definition Site is an Oracle term In this sample script the term equates to the primary server the server that we are now configuring Authentication and Directory tasks are associated with the ethO network interface The script prompts you with the existing IP address of ethO on this server Enter the new IP address for etho Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 10 230 67 40 The term Master Site is an Oracle term In this sample script the term equates to the secondary server Authentication and Directory tasks are associated with the ethO network interface Enter the IP address of ethO on the secondary VCX server For 3Com VCX Multi Master Replication DROP NAME S OF SCHEMA TO DROP REPLICATION vcxdatatestone Do you want to continue with the above settings n yl y Enter y to accept the information that you have entered or enter n to change one or more of the items If you enter n the script prompts you with the current value for each item and
354. upgrade history of the system When you are downgrading use the earlier of the two operating system versions in this command vex os switch 4 2 1 To confirm that you have selected the operating system version that you want repeat the vex os query command Verify that the word selected appears in the Status column for the version that you want Example OS Version Partition Label Status A 4 2 1 dev hda2 A selected B 5 1 3 dev hda3 B active Reboot the Server Reboot the system using this command reboot When the system reboots it starts VCX 7 0 services 298 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE Downgrading a Multiple Site System 7 1 to 7 0 A For VCX systems that are installed at multiple sites upgrades and downgrades must be performed using a specific sequence of servers as described in this section CAUTION Back up all databases before beginning an upgrade Downgrading Regional Authentication and Directory Servers If a downgrade is required on a regional Authentication and Directory server the procedure is the same as that described in Downgrading a Single Site System 7 1 to 7 0 with one difference Each Authentication and Directory server contains a database schema for each region For each schema you must m Drop database replication m Restore the database from the backup file m Reestablish database replication Downgrading Regional IP Messaging Servers If a downgrade is required o
355. us is reported as NORMAL Do not continue to the next step until the replication is complete Note that replication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete g You can check the replication by entering the following command checkReplication 3 When the replication is complete enter the following command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit 4 Start the Authentication and Directory service on the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata start 5 Start the Tomcat process on the primary IP Telephony server and the secondary IP Telephony server by entering the following command S70tomcat start 6 Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices 273 Start IP Messaging on the primary IP Messaging server by entering the following command S60ums start Run the admincfg script on both the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server See Post Upgrade Requirements Upgrading a Multi Site System With No Branch Offices Upgrading the Call Records Server 1 2 Some VCX multi site systems have regional offices but no branch offices Each regional office contains a primary VCX server and a secondary VCX server These servers perform call processing and IP Messaging tasks One of the regional offices also contains a Call Records server which gathers call records from eac
356. users In a multi site VCX system configured to use global messaging the IP Messaging server is located on the regional office Each branch office runs the IP Telephony server only In this case the regional office provides messaging services for users at each branch office In version 7 1 multi site VCX systems you can configure branch and regional sites to use Global Voicemail Integration Each location must be running IP Messaging services which means that in a multi site system configured to use global messaging you cannot enable Global Voicemail Integration on a branch You can however enable Global Voicemail Integration on the region providing IP Messaging services to the branch This service is provided by a pair of Global Voicemail Central Servers GVCS to enable global voicemail integration on an entire IP Messaging system A GVCS coordinates mailbox creation and mailbox updates on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers You must install IP Messaging software on a GVCS and then set up the GVCS through the IP Messaging administrator configuration interface before enabling global voicemail integration on regional and branch office IP Messaging servers Refer to the P Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide for more information and for configuration options Once you have installed and configured a GVCS you can add existing IP Messaging servers to the Global Voicemail Integration system by runni
357. using database replication failure To upgrade the branch offices in Region 1 local messaging 1 Stop the Tomcat process on the Call servers in Region 1 by logging in to each server as root and executing the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop 2 Login to the first branch office server as root 3 Obtain a copy of the vex a11 7 0 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the branch office server The variable x indicates the version of VCX software for example vex all 7 0 3c tar that will replace version 6 0 The letter c is always appended to the version number 4 To start the upgrade process enter the following commands cd opt installtemp tar xvf vcx all 7 0 xc tar cd upgrade 7 0 xc install upgrade The system may prompt you to confirm that a new operating system version will be installed and indicates which disk partition will be used after the upgrade If you see such a prompt answer y The system displays several status messages The last two messages are Cue eee erum meet num cue Installation Completed Successfully VCX version 7 0 xc is now available 5 6 7 8 10 Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 287 Obtain a license key for the server See Obtaining a License Key File Install the license key See Installing a License Key File Switch to
358. ware versions of individual components and entire releases Verifying Component Software Versions To verify what the component software versions are Log onto the VCX system as root Navigate to opt 3com VCX scripts Enter this command vex assemble validate This lists all of the components and their software versions that comprise the current running assembly Verifying Release Software Version To verify what the running release software version is Log onto the VCX system as root Enter the following commands cd opt 3com ls 1 This command returns a list all of the installed releases and indicates the running VCX version The running VCX version is preceded by a symbolic link icon 5 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 21 Jan 13 09 13 VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 1c drwxr xr x 10 root root 4096 Jan 10 07 13 VCX 7 0 0c In this example the link points to version 7 0 1c The other listed release 7 0 0c is installed but not running For VCX systems running version 7 0 or higher you can log in as root and enter the following command vcx listversions This command returns a list all of the installed releases and indicates the running VCX version 7_0_10_11 2005 10 24 active 7 0 9 10 2005 10 18 installed 7089 2005 10 10 installed 7078 2005 09 20 installed Downgrading from 7 1 to 7 0 293 All components in a VCX system must run the same version of VCX software This requirement has the following implications You c
359. wing command to exit the cworks account and return to the root account exit Stop IP Messaging first on the primary IP Messaging server and then on the secondary IP Messaging server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S60ums stop Obtain a copy of the vex softswitch 7 1 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary IP Telephony server and on the secondary IP Telephony server The variable x indicates the version of VCX software for example vex all 7 1 3c tar that will replace the current version The letter c is always appended to the version number Obtain a copy of the vex ipmsg 7 1 xc tar software upgrade file and place it in the opt installtemp directory on the primary IP Messaging server and on the secondary IP Messaging server Next execute the following steps in the order listed a Upgrade the primary IP Telephony server See Upgrading the Primary IP Telephony Server wm Upgrade the primary IP Messaging server See Upgrading the Primary IP Messaging Server m Upgrade the secondary IP Telephony server See Upgrading the Secondary IP Telephony Server wm Upgrade the primary IP Messaging server See Upgrading the Secondary IP Messaging Server m Setup database replication on the primary IP Telephony server See Set Up Database Replication Upgrading the Primary IP Telephony Server Upgrading a Single Site System With Four Servers
360. witch to the new software version by entering the following command vex switchversion 7 0 xc 262 APPENDIX C UPGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE FROM V6 0 TO V7 0 Set Up Database Replication 1 The system displays several status messages and then reboots After the the reboot process has been completed the system starts VCX 7 0 x services After the system has completed the restart process verify that the upgrade has occurred by entering this command ls 1 opt 3com VCX The symbolic link VCX should point to the new version of the VCX software 7 0 xc Example Output opt 3com VCX opt 3com VCX 7 0 xc Stop the Authentication and Directory service by entering the following commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop Follow the steps in this section to set up database replication Stop the Tomcat process first on the primary VCX server and then on the secondary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop Set up replication on the primary VCX server by entering these commands cd opt 3com VCX vcxdata bin su cworks setupReplication The replication setup script starts Follow these steps a The Enter the VCX Site Identification i e Site rd prompt appears Enter site ID configured for this system For single site systems the site ID is identical for both the primary VCX server and the secondary VCX server b The Enter the Number of MASTER SI
361. with this office use the istVcxdata command See Manually Configuring Replication for an IP Telephony Server or IP Upgrading a Multi Site VCX System with Branch Offices 199 Telephony and Messaging Server for more information In this example there is one Master site Region 2 C The Enter the MASTER DEFINITION SITE IP Address IP address prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Definition site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on this server the Authentication and Directory server in Region 1 d The Enter the MASTER SITE 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 prompt appears Enter the IP address of the Master Site This is the IP address of the ethO interface on the Authentication and Directory server in Region 2 If there are more than one Master Sites this question repeats until the number of master sites specified in step b is reached e The Do you want to continue with the above settings n y prompt appears Enter y to continue The script executes When the replication is complete Multi Master Replication Status is reported as NORMAL Do not continue to the next step on this server until the replication is complete Note that replication can take approximately 20 minutes to complete f You can check the replication by entering the following command checkReplication Set up database replication on Region 2 by entering the following commands you should still be logged in to the Authentication and Di
362. xplorer tab right click the 3Com Call Processor service From the pop up menu select Maintenance then select Hard Restart to shutdown and restart the Call Processor service Managing the Accounting Service and the Authentication and Directory Service This section describes maintenance tasks for the following VCX services sometimes referred to as back end servers m Accounting service m Authentication and Directory service The location of each service depends on your VCX configuration m he Accounting service always runs on the server hosting the IP Telephony server m The Authentication and Directory service can run on either the IP Telephony server or in some multi site configurations on the Authentication and Directory server To determine where the IP address a service is running enter the following command logged in as root on the server hosting the primary call processor vex config services show This command returns a multi page display that shows your VCX system configuration including lines similar to the following See sss Displaying Accounting Service Local IP Address 10 230 63 6 For information on configuring Accounting Service groups see Chapter 2 For information on Authentication and Directory service database maintenance see Chapter 5 Managing the Accounting Service and the Authentication and Directory Service 57 Viewing Service Status 1 Starting a Service
363. y has not yet fully recharged after a prior power loss event A power loss event is detected by VCX software logged through syslog and reported as an SNMP trap Power Restoration Prior to Depleted Battery If power returns while a VCX server is operating on UPS battery power the VCX server wm Logs the event through syslog m Generates an SNMP trap indicating return of power wm Resumes normal operation Depleted Battery Each UPS is configured with a battery threshold The threshold charge is expressed as a percentage of remaining battery power The default is 2596 When the UPS battery reaches the configured threshold a VCX server a Logs this event through syslog wm Generates an SNMP trap indicating that shutdown is imminent m Starts an orderly shutdown of services and the VCX operating system If the VCX system has multiple UPS devices providing power the depleted battery event occurs only when both UPS devices are running on battery and are at or below the low battery threshold VCX Server Response to Power Events 139 Table 11 VCX Server Behavior for Power Events continued Event Response Final Shutdown The UPS receives a signal to turn off after a time delay the default is 270 seconds to allow for the last shutdown steps to complete The VCX system generates a trap indicating that shutdown in imminent If multiple VCX servers are powered from the same UPS all servers are provid
364. you enter the site ID of the Master Site Restore VCX Databases Before upgrading from version 7 0 to 7 1 you must have backed up the system databases To restore the database on each server that is running the IP Telephony and Messaging or IP Telephony software configuration see Restoring the VCX Authentication and Directory Server Database VCX systems require database replication between these servers You must restore the database on both servers Restore IP Messaging Databases Before upgrading from version 7 0 to 7 1 you must have backed up the IP Messaging databases To restore the database on each server that is running IP Messaging server software see the P Messaging Operations and System Administration Guide 296 APPENDIX D DOWNGRADING VCX SERVER SOFTWARE p VCX systems require mirroring between IP Messaging servers You must restore the database on both servers Establish VCX Database Replication On Master Definition Site that is running IP Telephony and IP Messaging server software or IP Telephony server software establish database replication On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S20vexdata stop S70tomcat stop On the Master Site the secondary server log in as root and enter these commands cd opt 3com VCX scripts rc3 d S70tomcat stop On the Master Definition Site the primary server log in a
365. ystem but want to revert to the previous version of VCX system software During a VCX system upgrade one component fails to upgrade and want to revert to the previous version of VCX system software If a component fails to upgrade contact your 3Com Support for assistance before proceeding To use the downgrade procedures in this section your VCX system must have previously been successfully running version 6 0 x The VCX system supports two operating system images If the upgrade required installation of a new VCX operating system version then the downgrade must revert to the previous installation This downgrade procedure assumes the VCX version 6 0 system databases were backed up before the upgrade to version 7 0 was performed These version 6 0 backups will be restored as part of the downgrade procedure The downgrade procedure does not back port any configuration or database modifications you might have made while running version 7 0 Following this procedure restores the VCX system to the operational state it was in prior to the upgrade occurring If an upgrade at a regional office is unsuccessful contact your 3Com Support for assistance and downgrade the regional office servers Do not upgrade any branch office servers that are associated with that regional office until the regional office upgrades are successful The database schema version on a branch office server must match the schema version on the regional office Aut

3Com V7000 Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents